Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley E300 User Manual
Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley E300 is an electronic overload relay that provides advanced motor protection in a compact and cost-effective package. It offers a range of features to safeguard your motors from electrical faults and ensure optimal performance.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Bul. 193/592
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Table of Contents
Product Overview
Installation and Wiring
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Digital Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Analog Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Communication Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Optional Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Standard Current-Based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ground Fault Current-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Voltage- and Power-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2
Control Module to Sensing Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Communication Module to Control Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Expansion Bus Digital and Analog I/O Modules and Power Supply
Expansion Bus Operator Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Expansion Bus Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 3
4
Table of Contents
Diagnostic Station
DIN Rail / Panel Mount Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Expansion Bus Peripherals Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Expansion Digital Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Expansion Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
External Line Current Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Current Transformer Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter (with Network Control). . . . . 52
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter (with Network Control). . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 3
Parameter Group Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Editing a Configuration Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Editing a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Stopping the Display Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Automatic Trip and Warning Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Chapter 4
System Operation and Configuration
Invalid Configuration Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186). . . . . . . . . . 67
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192) . . . . . 68
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Table of Contents
Control Module Type (Parameter 221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225) . . . . . . . . . 70
Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226) . . . . . . . . . 71
Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227) . . . . . . . . . 71
Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228) . . . . . . . . . 71
Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229) . . . . . . . . . 72
Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230) . . . . . . . . . 73
Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231) . . . . . . . . . 73
Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232) . . . . . . . . . 74
Option Match Action (Parameter 233) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device Configuration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Security Configuration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Expansion Bus Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Introduction to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 5
Table of Contents
6
Operating Modes
Protective Trip and Warning
Functions
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
Ground Fault Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Current Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Line Under Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Line Over Current Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Under Voltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Voltage Imbalance Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Phase Rotation Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Real Power (kW) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Commands
Metering and Diagnostics
Table of Contents
Chapter 7
Clear Max kW Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Clear Max kVAR Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Clear Max kVA Demand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chapter 8
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Current Warning Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Control Warning Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Firmware Revision Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Expansion Digital Module ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 7
8
Table of Contents
Invalid Configuration Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Invalid Configuration Cause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Table of Contents
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 9
Table of Contents
EtherNet/IP Communications
Firmware Updates
10
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Chapter 9
Determining Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility. . . . 377
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and MAC Scanner
Other Factors to Consider When Assigning Network Parameters 379
Web Server Security and System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Permanently Enabling the Web Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Behavior of Modules With Duplicate IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) File Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Automation Controller Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Offline E300 Electronic Overload Relay Integration with a Generic
Chapter 10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Parameter List
EtherNet/IP Information
Table of Contents
E300 Firmware Update Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Control Module Boot Code Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Control Module Application Code Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . 436
Control Module Uncompressed EtherNet/IP EDS File Firmware
Control Module Compressed EtherNet/IP EDS File Firmware
Control Module Compressed DeviceNet EDS File Firmware Update
Completed Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Chapter 11
Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Appendix A
Electromagnetic Compatibility Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Appendix B
Appendix C
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . 518
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 11
Table of Contents
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008. . . . . . . . . 525
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009. . . . . . . 526
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A . . . . . . . . . 528
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010. . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . 530
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . 531
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B . . . . . . . . . . . 536
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Overview
Chapter
1
Product Overview
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay is a microprocessor-based electronic overload relay that is designed to help protect three-phase or single-phase AC electric induction motors that are rated from 0.5…65,000 A. Its modular design, communication options, diagnostic information, simplified wiring, and integration into Logix makes the E300 the ideal overload for motor control applications in an automation system. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides flexibility, reduces engineering time, and maximizes uptime for important motor starter applications.
Modular Design
You can select the specific options that you need for your motor starter application. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay consists of three modules: sensing, control, and communications. You can customize each of the three with accessories to tailor the electronic motor overload for your application’s exact needs.
• Wide current range
• Sensing capabilities (Current, Ground Fault Current, and/or Voltage)
• Expansion I/O
• Operator interfaces
Communication Options
You can select from multiple communication options that integrate with Logixbased control systems. Developers can easily add the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay to Logix-based control systems using Integrated Architecture tools like
Add-on Profiles, Add-on Instructions, and Faceplates.
• EtherNet/IP (DLR)
• DeviceNet
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 13
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Diagnostic Information
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides a wide variety of diagnostic information to monitor motor performance, proactively alert you to possible motor issues, or identify the reason for an unplanned shutdown. Information includes:
• Voltage, Current, and Energy
• Trip / Warning Histories
• % Thermal Capacity Utilization
• Time to Trip
• Time to Reset
• Operational Hours
• Number of Starts
• Trip Snapshot
Simplified Wiring
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides an easy means to mount to both
IEC and NEMA Allen-Bradley contactors. A contactor coil adapter is available for the 100-C contactor, which allows the you to create a functional motor starter with only two control wires.
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Product Overview Chapter 1
Catalog Number
Explanation
E300 Electronic Overload Relay modules have their own catalog number.
Sensing Module
193 - ESM - VIG - 30A - C23
592
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
592 NEMA Overload Relay
Module Type
ESM Sensing Module
Sensing Module Type Sensing Current Range
VIG Current, Ground Fault Current,
Voltage, and Power
IG Current and Ground Fault Current
I Current
30A 0.5…30 A
60A 6…60 A
100A 10…100 A
200A 20…200 A
Sensing Module Mounting Style
C23 Mounts to 100-C09…-C23 Contactor
C55 Mounts to 100-C30…-C55 Contactor
C97 Mounts to 100-C60…-C97 Contactor
D180 Mounts to 100-D115…-D180 Contactor
S2 Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 0-2 Contactor
S3 Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 3 Contactor
S4
T
Mounts to Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 4 Contactor
DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Power Terminals
E3T Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Power Terminals for an E3 Plus Panel Mount Adapter
P DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Pass-thru Power Conductors
CT DIN Rail / Panel Mount with Pass-thru Power Conductors (used with External CTs)
Control Module
193 - EIO - 43 - 120
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type
EIO I/O Only Control Module
EIOGP I/O and Protection Control Module
(External Ground Fault Sensing
and PTC)
I/O Count
63 6 Inputs / 3 Relay Outputs
43 4 Inputs / 3 Relay Outputs
42 4 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
22 2 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
Control Voltage
24D 24V DC
120 110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz
240 220…240V AC, 50/60 H
Communication Module
193 - ECM - ETR
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type
ECM Communication Module
Communication Type
ETR EtherNet/IP with Dual Ethernet Ports
DNT DeviceNet
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 15
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Digital Expansion Module
193 - EXP - DIO - 42 - 120
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type I/O Type
EXP Expansion Module DIO Digital I/O
I/O Count
42 4 Inputs / 2 Relay Outputs
Communication Type
120 110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz Inputs
240 220…240V AC, 50/60 Hz Inputs
24D 24V DC Inputs
Analog Expansion Module
193 - EXP - AIO - 31
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type I/O Type
EXP Expansion Module AIO Analog I/O
I/O Count
31 3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Operator Station
193 - EOS - SCS
Module Type
EOS Operator Station
I/O Type
SCS Starter Control Station
SDS Starter Diagnostic Station
Power Supply
193 - EXP - PS - AC
Bulletin Number
193 IEC Overload Relay
Module Type Function Type
EXP Expansion Module PS Expansion Bus Power Supply
Supply Voltage
AC 110-240V AC, 50/60Hz control voltage
DC 24V DC control voltage
16 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Module Description
Product Overview Chapter 1
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is comprised of three modules. All three modules are required to make a functional overload relay.
• Sensing Module
• Control Module
• Communication Module
Sensing Module
Figure 1 - Sensing Module
The sensing module electronically samples data about the current, voltage, power, and energy that are consumed by the electric motor internal to the module. You can choose from one of three varieties of the sensing modules depending on the motor diagnostic information that is needed for the motor protection application:
• Current Sensing
• Current and Ground Fault Current Sensing
• Current, Ground Fault Current, Voltage, and Power Sensing
The current ranges for each of three varieties of sensing module are as follows:
• 0.5…30 A
• 6…60 A
• 10…100 A
• 20…200 A
You can choose how the sensing module mechanically mounts inside the electrical enclosure. The following mounting mechanisms are available for the sensing module.
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 IEC Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA
Contactor
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals
• Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals for an
Allen-Bradley E3 Plus panel mount adapter
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with pass-thru power conductors
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 17
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Control Module
Figure 2 - Control Module
The control module is the heart of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay and can attach to any sensing module. The control module performs all protection and motor control algorithms and contains the native I/O for the system. The control module has two varieties:
• I/O only
• I/O and protection (PTC and External Ground Fault Current Sensing)
The control module is offered in three control voltages:
• 110…120V AC, 50/60Hz
• 220…240V AC, 50/60Hz
• 24V DC
External control voltage is required to power the E300 Electronic Overload Relay and activate the digital inputs.
Communication Module
Figure 3 - Communication Module
18
The communication module allows the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to be integrated into an automation system, and it can attach to any control module.
All communication modules allow you to set the node address with rotary turn
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Product Overview Chapter 1 dials, and it provides diagnostic status indicators to provide system status at the panel. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports two network protocols:
• EtherNet/IP
• DeviceNet
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module has two RJ45 connectors that function as a switch. You can daisy chain multiple E300 Electronic Overload
Relays with Ethernet cable, and the module supports a Device Level Ring (DLR).
Optional Add-On Modules
Optional Expansion I/O
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to add more digital and analog
I/O to the system via the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Expansion Bus if the native I/O count is not sufficient for the application on the base relay. You can add any combination of up to four Digital I/O Expansion Modules that have four inputs (120V AC, 240V AC, or 24V DC) and two relay outputs.
You can also add up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules, which have three independent universal analog inputs and one isolated analog output. The Analog
I/O Expansion Modules require Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher. The independent universal analog inputs can accept the following signals:
• 4…20 mA
• 0…20 mA
• 0…10V DC
• 1…5V DC
• 0…5V DC
• RTD Sensors (Pt 385, Pt 3916, Cu 426, Ni 618, Ni 672, and NiFe 518)
• Resistance (150
, 750
, 3000
, and 6000
)
The isolated analog output can be programmed to reference a traditional analog signal (4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, 0…10V DC, 1…5V, or 0…10V) to represent the following diagnostic values:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 19
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Optional Operator Station
Figure 4 - Operator Stations
LOCA
L
TE
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
Stop
Reset
0
Control Station
RESET
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
REMO L
TE
Diagnostic Station
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
Escape
Up
Select
Enter
Down
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers you the capability to add one operator interface to the Expansion Bus. You can choose between two types of operator stations: Control Station or a Diagnostic Station. Both types of operator stations mount into a standard 22 mm push button knockout, and they provide diagnostic status indicators that allow you to view the status of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay from the outside of an electrical enclosure. Both operator stations provide push buttons that can be used for motor control logic, and they both can be used to upload and download parameter configuration data from the base relay.
The Diagnostic Station contains a display and navigation buttons that allows you to view and edit parameters in the base relay. The Diagnostic Station requires
Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply
Figure 5 - Expansion Bus Power Supply
20
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay expansion bus provides enough current to operate a system that has (1) Digital Expansion Module and (1) Operator
Station. An E300 Electronic Overload Relay system that contains more expansion modules needs supplemental current for the Expansion Bus. The E300
Electronic Overload Relay offers you two types of Expansion Bus Power
Supplies: AC (110…240V AC, 50/60 Hz) and DC (24V DC). One Expansion
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protection Features
Product Overview Chapter 1
Bus Power Supply supplies enough current for a fully loaded E300 Electronic
Overload Relay Expansion Bus (four Digital Expansion Modules, four Analog
Expansion Modules, and one Operator Station). You can use either Expansion
Bus Power Supply with any combination of Digital and Analog Expansion
Modules.
Standard Current-Based Protection
All versions of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay provide the following motor protection functions:
• Thermal Overload (51)
• Phase Loss
• Current Imbalance (46)
• Undercurrent – load loss (37)
• Overcurrent – load jam (48)
• Overcurrent – load stall
• Start Inhibit (66)
Ground Fault Current-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay sensing modules and control modules with a ground fault current option provides the following motor protection function:
• Ground Fault – zero sequence method (50N)
Voltage- and Power-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay sensing modules with voltage sensing provides the following motor protection functions:
• Undervoltage (27)
• Overvoltage (59)
• Phase Reversal (47) – voltage-based
• Over and Under Frequency (81) – voltage-based
• Voltage Imbalance (46)
• Over and Under Power (37)
• Over and Under Leading/Lagging Power Factor (55)
• Over and Under Reactive Power Generated
• Over and Under Reactive Power Consumed
• Over and Under Apparent Power
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 21
Chapter 1 Product Overview
Applications:
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can be used with the following across the line starter applications:
• Non-reversing starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye (Star) / Delta starter
• Two-speed motors
• Low and medium voltage with two or three potential transformers
• With or without Phase current transformers
• With or without zero-sequence core balanced current transformer
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Chapter
2
Installation and Wiring
Introduction
Receiving
Unpacking/Inspecting
Storing
This chapter provides instructions for receiving, unpacking, inspecting, and storing the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay. Assembly, installation, and wiring instructions for common applications are also included in this chapter.
It is your responsibility to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is your responsibility not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. If any concealed damage is found during unpacking, it is again your responsibility to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.
Remove all packing material from around the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
After unpacking, check the item’s nameplate catalog number against the purchase order.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay should remain in its shipping container before installation. If you will not use the equipment immediately, you must store it according to the following instructions to maintain warranty coverage:
• Store in a clean, dry location.
• Store within an ambient temperature range
of -40…+85 °C (-40…+185 °F).
• Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, non-condensing.
• Do not store where the device could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
• Do not store in a construction area.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 23
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
General Precautions
Base Relay Assembly
24
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is being deployed in an environment with an ambient temperature greater than 30 °C (86 °F), please see the
for the appropriate temperature derating. In addition to the specific precautions listed throughout this manual, the following general statements must be observed.
ATTENTION: The E300 Electronic Overload Relay contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts and assemblies. Status control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing this assembly.
Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, see Allen-Bradley publication 8000-SB001_-en-p, “Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage”, or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed E300 Electronic Overload Relay can result in damage to the components or reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors (for example, incorrectly calculating the FLA setting, supplying incorrect or inadequate supply voltage, connecting an external supply voltage to the thermistor terminals, or operating or storing in excessive ambient temperatures) may result in malfunction of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the E300 Electronic Overload Relay and associated machinery should plan to install, start up, and maintain the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: The purpose of this user manual is to serve as a guide for proper installation. The National Electrical Code (NEC) and any other governing regional or local code overrules this information. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
ATTENTION: The earth ground terminal of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection.
The following section illustrates the E300 Electronic Overload Relay base relay assembly instructions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Control Module to Sensing
Module Assembly
You can connect any E300 Control Module to any E300 Sensing Module. The following illustrations show the steps that are required to make this connection.
Figure 6 - Control Module to Sensing Module Assembly
1
2
3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 25
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Communication Module to
Control Module Assembly
You can connect any E300 Communication Module to any E300 Control
Module. The illustrations below show the steps required to make this connection.
Figure 7 - Communication Module to Control Module Assembly
2
3
1
26 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Expansion Bus Peripherals
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers a range of Expansion Digital and
Analog I/O modules that simply connect to the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay’s Expansion Bus.
Panel Mount
Hole
DIN Rail Mount
Panel Mount Hole
Expansion Bus Out
Expansion Bus In
Figure 8 - Expansion Bus Peripherals
Removable I/O Terminals
Color
Off
Blinking Green
Status LED
Description
No power applied
Module OK with no connection
Green
Red
Module OK and active
Error Detected
D2
D1
D4T
D3
T
Digital Module Number Selector
Number Description
D1 - D4
D1T - D4T
Module number
Module number with expansion bus terminating resistor applied
Analog Module Number Selector
Number Description
A1 - A4
A1T - A4T
Module number
Module number with expansion bus terminating resistor applied
Note: If the expansion bus does not have an operator station, then the last expansion module number must be set to terminated.
You can also add one of the two available operator stations to the end of the
Expansion Bus.
Figure 9 - Expansion Operator Stations
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Power LED
Trip / Warn LED
Escape
Up
Select
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
REMO L
TE
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward / Speed 1
Start Reverse / Speed 2
Local / Remote
LOCA
L
TE
Stop
Reset
Diagnostic Station
0
RESET
Enter
Down
Control Station
The following illustrations show how to mount and connect the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay expansion bus I/O modules, expansion power supplies, and operator stations.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 27
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Expansion Bus Digital and
Analog I/O Modules and
Power Supply Installation
Figure 10 - Expansion Bus Digital and Analog I/O Modules and Power Supply
1
Click
2
Expansion Bus Operator
Station Installation
Figure 11 - Expansion Bus Operator Station
22 mm
2
1.7 N.m
(15 lb-in)
ESC
SELE
CT
LO
REM
OTE
0
RESE
T
1
3
800F-AW2
Expansion Bus Network
Installation
28
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to (4) Expansion Digital I/O modules, (4) Expansion Analog I/O modules, and (1) Operation Station. The
E300 Base Relay can supply enough power for (1) Expansion Digital I/O module and (1) Operator Station. Any other combination of E300 Expansion Bus
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2 peripherals requires an Expansion Bus Power Supply, which connects as the first module on the Expansion Bus.
Set the module number dial of the Expansion Digital Module to a unique digital module number (D1-D4). If the Expansion Digital Module is the last device on the Expansion Bus, set the module number to the value that enables the internal terminating resistor (D1T-D4T). A power cycle is required when changes are made to the module number dial.
Set the module number dial of the Expansion Analog Module to a unique analog module number (A1-A4). If the Expansion Analog Module is the last device on the Expansion Bus, set the module number to the value that enables the internal terminating resistor (A1T-A4T). A power cycle is required when changes are made to the module number dial.
Connect the E300 Base Relay to the Expansion Module’s Input Port using the supplied Expansion Bus cable. Add the next Expansion Module by connecting the supplied Expansion Bus cable to the Output Port of the previous Expansion
Module and into the Input Port of the additional Expansion Module. The
Operator Station is the last device on the E300 Expansion Bus; it only has an
Input Port with an internal Expansion Bus terminating resistor.
If the user-supplied Expansion Bus cable is not long enough for the installation,
1-meter (Cat. No. 193-EXP-CBL-1M) and 3-meter (Cat. No.
193-EXP-CBL-3M) Expansion Bus cables are available as accessories. The E300 expansion bus can support a maximum distance of 5 meters (16 ft.).
Figure 12 - Expansion Bus Network Installation
ESC
SELEC
T
LOCA
L
TE
0
RESET
1
2
Click
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 29
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Starter Assembly
The following illustrations show how to assemble an E300 Electronic Overload
Relay as a motor starter with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100-C contactor.
100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation
The starter assembly installation instructions are for use with E300 Sensing
Module catalog numbers 193-ESM-___-___-C23 and 193-ESM-___-___-C55
5 - 7 lb-in
IN1
IN0
A2
R04
R03
A1
6
Figure 13 - 100-C09…-C55 Starter Assembly Installation
5 9 - 22 lb-in
4
3
2
7 -11 lb-in
1
30 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Starter Dimensions
37 (1.47) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
45
(1.76)
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 14 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C23 with 100-C09…-C23 Contactor
87
(3.40)
35
(1.37) n 5 (0.18)
67 (2.65)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
60 (2.3
152 (5.98)
122 (4.81)
122 (4.81)
37 (1.48) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
29 (1.14)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
122
(4.78)
45
(1.76)
Figure 15 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C55 with 100-C30…-C37 Contactor
104
(4.10)
35
(1.374) n 5 (0.18)
67 (2.65)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
60 (2.36)
152 (5.98)
29 (1.13)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
122
(4.78)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 31
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
37 (1.48) FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
152 (5.98)
34 (1.34)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
54
(2.12)
Figure 16 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C55 with 100-C43…-C55 Contactor
107
(4.21)
45 (1.75) n 5 (0.18)
190 (7.49)
(ADD 5 mm (0.19 in.)
FOR CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
67 (2.65)
60 (2.
5.10
129.5)
1.71
(43.5)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
2.82
(71.6)
45 (1.76)
122
(4.82)
Figure 17 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-__-C97 with 100-C60…-C97 Contactor
4.97
(126.2)
0.21
(5.4)
2.165
(55)
3.60
(91.6)
6.99
(177.6)
9.26
(235.1)
(ADD 0.24 FOR
CONTACTOR COIL
ON LINE SIDE)
3.98
(101)
1.53
(38.9)
FROM
CONTACTOR
MTG. HOLE
5.32
(135.2)
32 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 18 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S2 with NEMA Contactor Size 0 and Size 1
90
(3.56) n 6 (0.22)
157 (6.17)
180 (7.06)
249 (9.78)
12 (0.46)
35 (1.38)
125
(4.91)
70
(2.75)
Figure 19 - E300 Sensing Module 592-ESM-___-__-S2 with NEMA Contactor Size 2
100
(3.94) n 6 (0.22)
184 (7.24)
219 (8.63)
276 (10.85)
40 (1.58)
80
(3.15)
12 (0.46)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
125
(4.91)
33
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
DIN Rail / Panel Mount
Dimensions
148 (5.83)
45
(1.764)
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 20 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-30A-E3T and 193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
126
(4.94)
6 (0.24)
30
(1.18)
9 (0.33)
46 (1.81)
4 (0.16) q
4 (0.14)
135 (5.32)
6 (0.217)
101 (3.96)
0.45
(11.35)
4 (0.154) n 5 (0.17)
8 (0.30)
Figure 21 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-30A-T and 193-ESM-___-60A-T
SHOWN WITH PANEL MOUNT FEET ACCESSORY n 0.189 (4.8)
1.53
(39)
5.32
(135)
WITH MTG. FEET
1.19
(30.1) q
0.18
(4.5)
4.58
(116.2)
W/O MTG. FEET
4.921
(125)
1.76
(45)
4.88
(124)
Mount feet accessory Cat. No.: 140M-C-N45
0.197
(5)
34 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
5.51
(139.9)
2.82
(71.6)
1.63
(41.4)
1.62
(41.2)
Figure 22 - E300 Sensing Module 193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
0.70
(17.7)
0.22
(5.5) q
3.02
(76.6)
5.57
(141.5)
0.16
(4.05)
2.36
(60)
5.12
(130)
Expansion Bus Peripherals
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions are shown in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
Figure 23 - E300 Digital Expansion Module 193-EXP-DIO-___
22.5
(0.89)
2 x 4.5 (0.18) dia.
98 (3.86) 87 (3.43) 80.75 (3.18)
120
(4.73)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 35
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
22.5
(0.89)
Figure 24 - E300 Expansion Analog Module 193-EXP-AIO
2 x 4.5 (0.18) dia.
98 (3.86) 87 (3.43) 80.75 (3.18)
98
(3.86)
87
(3.43)
45
(1.77)
120
(4.73)
Figure 25 - E300 Expansion Power Supply 193-EXP-PS-___
4x 4.5 (0.18) dia
120
(4.73)
80.75 (3.18)
12
(0.47)
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
70
(2.76)
100
(3.94)
Figure 26 - E300 Starter Control Station 193-EOS-SCS
18.5
(0.73)
13.5
(0.53)
45 (1.77)
100
(3.94)
Figure 27 - E300 Starter Diagnostic Station 193-EOS-SDS
18.5
(0.73)
13.5 (0.53)
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
22.5 (0.89) dia.
22.5 (0.89) dia.
Terminals
Sensing Module
Wire Type
Table 1 - E300 Sensing Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Single
Multiple
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-ESM-_ _ _-30A-_ _ _
193-ESM-_ _ _-60A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-30A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-60A-_ _ _
193-ESM-_ _ _-100A-_ _ _
592-ESM-_ _ _-100A-_ _ _
#14…6 AWG
22 lb-in.
#10…6 AWG
30 lb-in.
2.5…16 mm2
2.5 N•m
6…10 mm2
3.4 N•m
2.5…25 mm2
2.5 N•m
6…16 mm2
3.4 N•m
#12…1 AWG
35 lb-in.
#6…2 AWG
35 lb-in.
4…35 mm2
4 N•m
4…25 mm2
4 N•m
4…50 mm2
4 N•m
4…35 mm2
4 N•m
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 37
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Power / PTC
Terminals
Control Module
Figure 28 - E300 Control Module Terminal Designations
193-EIO-63- _ _ _ 193-EIOGP-42- _ _ _
R13R14
R23 R24
A1 A1
A2IN2
IN3 IN4
IN5
R13R14
S1 S2
A1 A1
A2IN2
IN3 IT1
IT2
193-EIO-43- _ _ _
A1 A1
A2 IN2
IN3
R13R14
R23 R24
193-EIOGP-22- _ _ _
A1 A1
A2
IT1 IT2
R13R14
S1 S2
Communication
Module Latch
Expansion Bus Connector
Relay / Ground Fault
Terminals Sensing Module Latch
IN1
IN0
A2
R04
R03
A1
Input / Output
Terminals
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Table 2 - E300 Control Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule
Metric
Single
Multiple
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EIO-_ _-_ _ _
193-EIOGP-_ _-_ _ _
24...12 AWG
4lb-in
24...16 AWG
4 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.45 N•m
Figure 29 - Control Module Wiring
193-EIOGP-_ _-_ _ _
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
193-EIO-_ _-_ _ _
A1 R03 R04 A2 IN0 IN1
RELAY 0
Additional Inputs for 193-EIO-63-_ _ _
A1 R03 R04 A2 IN0 IN1
RELAY 0
Additional Inputs for 193-EIOGP-42-_ _ _
A1 A1 A2
(+) (-)
IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5
RELAY 1 RELAY 2
PE R13 R14 R23 R24 A1 A1 A2
(+) (-)
IN2 IN3 IT1
PTC
IT2 PE R13
RELAY 1
R14 S1
Ground
Fault
S2
+ t
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 39
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Expansion Digital Module
Figure 30 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Terminal Designations
IN2 IN3
IN0 IN1 INC
Table 3 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EXP-DIO-42-_ _ _
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Figure 31 - E300 Expansion Digital Module Wiring Diagram
R04 R14 RC3
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 INC
Expansion Analog Module
Figure 32 - E300 Expansion Analog Module Terminal Designations
OUT+OUT-
IN2+ IN2- RS2
IN1+ IN1- RS1
IN0+ IN0- RS0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 41
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Table 4 - E300 Expansion Analog Module Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
Single
Multiple
Cat. No.
193-EXP-AIO-31
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
Figure 33 - E300 Expansion Analog I/O Modules 193-EXP-AIO-__
+
24V DC
Power
Supply
-
Analog Current Input
Current
Input
Device
INx+
INx-
Analog Voltage Input
+V
-V
INx+
INx-
3 Wire RTD
INx+
2 Wire RTD/Resistance
INx+
INx-
INx-
RSx
Analog Voltage or Current Output
Out+
Out-
+
Device
-
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Expansion Power Supply
Figure 34 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Terminal Designations
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
A1 A2
Table 5 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Wire Size and Torque Specifications
Wire Type
Stranded/Solid [AWG]
Flexible-Stranded with Ferrule Metric
Coarse-Stranded/Solid Metric
Conductor Torque
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Single
Multiple
(stranded only)
Cat. No.
193-EXP-PS-_ _
24...12 AWG
5 lb-in
24...16 AWG
5 lb-in
0.25…2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.5...0.75 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...2.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
0.2...1.5 mm
2
0.55 N•m
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 43
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Figure 35 - E300 Expansion Power Supply Wiring Diagram
A1 A2
Grounding
The following grounding recommendations are provided to help ensure EMC requirements during installation .
• The earth ground terminal of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection.
• Wire the green shield wire of the Cat. No. 193-ECM-ETR into the earth ground terminal of the E300 control module.
• Installations employing an external ground fault sensor shall ground the cable shield at the sensor with no connection made at the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
• The PTC thermistor cable shield shall be grounded at the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay with no connection made at the opposite end.
Short-Circuit Ratings
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is suitable for use on circuits capable of delivering not more than the RMS symmetrical amperes listed in the following tables.
Table 6 - Standard Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1
Max. Available Fault Current [A] Maximum Voltage [V] Overload Relay with Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
193-ESM-___-30A-P
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
193-ESM-___-60A-P
193-ESM-___-60A-T
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
193-ESM-___-100A-T
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
5,000
10,000
600
600
44 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Overload Relay with
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55,
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
Table 7 - Short Circuit Ratings per EN60947-4-1
Overload Relay with Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55
193-ESM-___-30A-E3T
193-ESM-___-30A-P
193-ESM-___-30A-T
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-60A-E3T
193-ESM-___-60A-P
193-ESM-___-60A-T
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
193-ESM-___-100A-E3T
193-ESM-___-100A-T
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
Prospective Short-
Circuit Current, I r
[A]
3,000
5,000
Contactor Cat. No.
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
Conditional Short-Circuit
Current, I q
[A]
Maximum Voltage [V]
100,000
100,000
690
690
Table 8 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with Bul.
100-C and 100-D IEC contactors that are protected by fuses
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
Max. Voltage [V] Max. Starter FLC [A]
23
30
37
43
9
12
16
55
72
85
97
100,000 600
Class C or JJ fuse [A]
30
50
50
70
20
20
30
80
100
150
200
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 45
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Overload Relay with
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
Contactor Cat. No.
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
Overload Relay with Sensing Module
Cat. No.
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
Table 9 - Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with Bul. 100-C IEC contactors that are protected by Bul. 140U-D circuit breakers
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
Max. Voltage [V]
Max. Circuit Breaker
Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-
Max. Starter FLC[A]
23
9
12
16
9
12
16
23
9
12
16
23
65,000
35,000
5,000
480Y/277V
600Y/347V
600Y/347V
C30 (30 A)
C30 (30 A)
C30 (30 A)
Contactor Size
00
0
1
2
3
Table 10 - High Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL60947-4-1 and CSA 22.2 No. EN60947-4-1 with
Bul. 500 line NEMA contactors that are protected by fuses
Max. Starter FLC [A]
9
18
27
45
90
Max. Available Fault
Current [A]
100,000
Max. Voltage
[V]
600
240
600
240
600
240
600
240
600
100
60
200
100
30
30
60
30
Max. UL Fuse [A]
R
—
J
20
30
30
100
50
200
100
350
200
Fuse Coordination
The following tables list Type I and Type II Fuse Coordination when used with
Bulletin 100-C and 100-D and Bulletin 500 NEMA Size 00… 2 Contactors.
ATTENTION: Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the
NEC and any other governing regional or local codes.
46 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Table 11 - Type 1 and Type II fuse coordination with Bul. 100-C and 100-D contactors per
EN60947-4-1
Overload Relay with
Sensing Module Cat. No.
193-ESM-___-30A-C23
193-ESM-___-30A-C55,
193-ESM-___-60A-C55
193-ESM-___-100A-C97
Overload Relay with Sensing
Module Cat. No.
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-30A-S2
592-ESM-___-60A-S2
592-ESM-___-100A-S3
Contactor Cat.
No.
100-C09
100-C12
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
100-C37
100-C43
100-C55
100-C72
100-C85
100-C97
Max. Starter
FLC[A]
9
12
16
23
30
37
43
55
72
85
97
Prospective Short-Circuit
Current, I r
[A]
1000
3,000
5,000
Conditional Short-
Circuit Current, I q
[A]
100,000
Max. Voltage
[V]
Type I Class J or
CC Fuse [A]
20
20
30
40
600
100
150
200
50
50
70
80
Type II Class J or CC Fuse [A]
15
20
30
40
50
50
70
80
100
150
200
Table 12 - Type 1 and Type II fuse coordination with Bul. 100-C and 100-D contactors
per EN60947-4-1
Contactor Size Max. Starter FLC[A]
Prospective Short-
Circuit Current, I r
[A]
2
3
0
1
18
27
45
90
3,000
5,000
Conditional Short-
Circuit Current, I q
[A]
Max. Voltage
[V]
Type I Class J
Fuse [A]
Type II Class J
Fuse [A]
100,000 600
30
30
60
200
30
30
60
200
Typical Motor Connections
ATTENTION: When working on energized circuits, DO NOT rely on voltage and current information that is provided by the E300 Electronic Overload Relay for personal safety. Always use a portable voltage or current measurement device to measure the signal locally.
Three-Phase Direct On-Line (DOL) and Single-Phase Full-voltage
The following wiring diagram illustrates the E300 Electronic Overload Relay typical motor connections in a three-phase DOL and single-phase full-voltage applications.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 47
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Figure 36 - E300 DOL and Single-Phase Full-voltage Connections
Three-Phase Direct-On-Line Single-Phase Full-Voltage
S.C.P.D.
S.C.P.D.
L 1 L 2
E300
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
L 3
T1
T2
T3
M
L 1 L 2
E300
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
T1 T2
M
External Line Current
Transformer Application
Current Transformer Ratio
The following E300 Electronic Overload Relay sensing module catalog numbers can be used with step down current transformers:
• 193-ESM-IG-30A-E3T
• 193-ESM-IG-30A-T
• 193-ESM-IG-30A-P
• 193-ESM-I-30A-E3T
• 193-ESM-I-30A-T
• 193-ESM-I-30A-P
• 193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
CT Primary (Parameter 263) and CT Secondary (Parameter 264) allows you to identify the turns ratio of the step down current transformers in use. Based on these two configuration parameters, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay will automatically adjust the measured current. Use the primary current for your FLA settings.
48 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Table 13 - CT Primary (Parameter 263)
CT Primary (Parameter 263)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
Table 14 - CT Secondary (Parameter 264)
CT Secondary (Parameter 264)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Amps
5
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Amps
ATTENTION: Improper configuration of the CT Ratio parameters can make the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay report inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage.
IMPORTANT The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trip on a configuration fault when the FLA setting is outside of the legal range of the selected CT Ratio settings. The TRIP/
WARN LED status indicator flashes red 3-long, 8-short blinking pattern.
You shall (1) provide one CT for each motor phase and shall (2) connect the
CT’s secondary leads to the appropriate sensing module power terminals. The
CTs shall be selected to be capable of providing the required VA to the secondary load, which includes the E300 Sensing Module burden of 0.1 VA at the rated secondary current and the wiring burden. Finally, the CT shall (1) be rated for
Protective Relaying to accommodate the high inrush currents associated with motor startup and shall (2) be accurate to within ≤±2% over its normal operating range. Typical CT ratings include:
• ANSI USA
• CSA (Canada)
• IEC (Europe)
• Class C5 BO.1
• Class 10L5
• 5 VA Class SP10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 49
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
50
ATTENTION: The improper selection of a current transformer can result in the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay reporting inaccurate motor operational data and possible motor damage. The selected current transformer must be rated for protective relaying applications.
Figure 37 - External Current Transformer Connection
IEC NEMA
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
K1
Primary
Current
Transformers
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
E300
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
Primary
Current
Transformers
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
E300
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
M
T1
T2
M
T3
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay voltage-based sensing modules support a wide variety of power systems.
lists the power systems supported by the specific sensing module.
Table 15 - Supported Power Systems
Catalog Number Connection Type
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Direct
Direct
3 PT
2 PT
Power System
Single Phase
Delta
Wye
Grounded B Phase Delta
Single Phase
Delta
Wye
Grounded B Phase Delta
Delta
Wye
Single Phase
Open Delta
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Voltage Mode
Voltage Mode (Parameter 252) determines the method for how voltage is monitored E300 Electronic Overload Relay. Select the connection type for the appropriate power system.
Table 16 - Voltage Mode (Parameter 352)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Delta direct or with PTs
0 = Delta direct or with PTs
1 = Wye direct or with PTs
2 = Delta with Delta to Wye PTs
3 = Wye with Delta to Wye PTs
4 = Delta with Wye to Delta PTs
5 = Wye with Wye to Delta PTs
USINT
Potential (Voltage) Transformer Ratio
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay sensing module catalog number
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT can be used with step down potential (voltage) transformers. PT Primary (Parameter 353) and PT Secondary (Parameter 354) allows you to identify the turns ratio of the step down potential (voltage) transformers in use. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay will automatically adjust the measured voltage based on these two configuration parameters. Use the primary voltage for your voltage protection settings.
Table 17 - PT Primary (Parameter 353)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
480
1
65535
UINT
2
1
Amps
Table 18 - PT Secondary (Parameter 354)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
480
165535
UINT
2
1
Amps
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 51
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Control Circuits
ATTENTION: Do not exceed the ratings of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s output and trip relay. If the coil current or voltage of the contactor exceeds the overload relay’s ratings, an interposing relay must be used.
ATTENTION: When the power is applied to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s
A1 and A2 terminals, the N.O. relay contact that is assigned as a Trip Relay closes after approximately 2 seconds if no trip condition exists.
ATTENTION: More control circuit protection may be required. See the applicable electrical codes.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can provide motor control logic for many
different types of motor starters (see Chapter 5
for more information on
Operating Modes). By default, the E300 is configured for the Overload-Network operating mode. The following wiring diagrams are typical control circuits for
Non-Reversing and Reversing Motor starters that use the Overload-Network operating mode when Relay 0 (terminals R03 and R04) is configured to be a normally closed Trip Relay.
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Starter (with Network Control)
Figure 38 - NEMA Nomenclature
Relay 1
R13 R14 A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03 R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
52 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Installation and Wiring Chapter 2
Figure 39 - CENELEC Nomenclature
L1
Relay 1 R13
R14
Relay 0 Configured as a Trip Relay 2
R03
R04
K
A1
A2
N
2 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Full-Voltage Reversing Starter (with Network Control)
Figure 40 - NEMA Nomenclature
Relay 1
REV
R13 R14
Relay 0 Configured as a
Trip Relay 1
A1 A2
FOR
95 96
Relay 2
R23 R24
FOR
1 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 53
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Figure 41 - CENELEC Nomenclature
L1
R03
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
2
R04
Relay 1
R13
R14
Relay 2
R23
R24
K2 K1
A1
K1
A2
K2
A1
A2
N
2 Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
54 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Chapter
3
Diagnostic Station
Introduction
Navigation Keys
Key
Displaying a Parameter
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports a Diagnostic Station on the E300
Expansion Bus (requires Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher). The
Diagnostic Station allows you to view any E300 parameter and edit any configuration parameter. This chapter explains the Diagnostic Station’s navigation keys, how to view a parameter, how to edit a configuration parameter, and the Diagnostic Station’s programmable display sequence.
The E300 Diagnostic Station has five navigation keys that are used to navigate through the Diagnostic Station’s display menu system and edit configuration parameters.
Name
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Description
Scroll through the display parameters or groups.
Increment or decrement values.
Escape
Select
Enter
Back one step in the navigation menu.
Cancel a change to a configuration parameter value
Select the next bit when viewing a bit enumerated parameter.
Select the next digit when editing a configuration value.
Select the next bit when editing a bit enumerated parameter.
Start the navigation menu.
Advance one step in the navigation menu.
Display the description for a bit enumerated parameter.
Edit a configuration parameter value.
Save the change to the configuration parameter value.
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to view parameters using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. The menu prompts you to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or
E300 system information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 55
Chapter 3 Diagnostic Station
Parameter Group Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the select the Groups navigation method and press .
or keys to
Use the
.
or keys to select the parameter group to display and press
56
Use the group.
or keys to view the parameters that are associated with that
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the parameter group navigation system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Diagnostic Station Chapter 3
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
Linear List Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the key. Use the select the Linear List navigation method and press .
or keys to
Use the and press
or
.
and keys to select the parameter number to display
Use the or keys to view the next sequential parameter.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press each bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of
to return to the parameter.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 57
Chapter 3 Diagnostic Station
58
Press to return to the linear list navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
System Info
The E300 Diagnostic Station can display firmware revision information, view the time and date of the E300 virtual clock, and edit the time and date of the E300 virtual clock. To view E300 system information, start the navigation menu by pressing
.
key. Use the or keys to select System Info and press
Use the or keys to view the E300 system information.
To edit the system date or time, press
keys to select the new value. Press
to save the new system values or press restore the previous system values.
to modify the value. Use the or
to select the next system value. Press
to cancel the modification and
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Diagnostic Station Chapter 3
Editing Parameters
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Configuration Parameter
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to edit configuration parameters using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the
key. You will be prompted to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 system information. Choose the appropriate method and navigate to the parameter to be modified.
Editing a Numeric Parameter
To edit a configuration parameter, press the the or values or press
key to modify the value. Use
keys to select the new value. Press to save the new system
to cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 59
Chapter 3 Diagnostic Station
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter
When editing a bit enumerated parameter, press the key to view the description of each bit. Use the
Press to edit the next bit. Press
or keys to select the new bit value.
to save the new value or press cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
to
Programmable Display
Sequence
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Display Sequence
The E300 Diagnostic Station sequentially displays up to seven screens every five seconds.
• Three-phase current
• Three-phase voltage
• Total power
• User-defined screen 1
• User-defined screen 2
• User-defined screen 3
• User-defined screen 4
The three-phase voltage and total power screens are only included in the sequence when the E300 Electronic Overload Relay has a voltage, current, and ground fault current (VIG)-based Sensing Module.
60 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Diagnostic Station Chapter 3
The user-defined screens allow you to select up to two parameters per screen.
Refer to Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens on page 86 to configure the
Screen# and Parameter# (Parameters 428…435).
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the Diagnostic Station will automatically cancel any editing modifications, restore the previous value, and return to its programmable display sequence.
Stopping the Display Sequence
To stop the display sequence, press sequence through the displays. Press sequence.
. Use the or keys to manually
to return to the automatic display
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display
Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 61
Chapter 3 Diagnostic Station
Automatic Trip and Warning
Screens
When the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is in a trip or warning state, the E300
Diagnostic Station automatically displays the trip or warning event.
Press any of the navigation keys ( the automatic display sequence.
, , , , or ) to return to
When the trip or warning event clears, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to its programmable display sequence.
If a different parameter is displayed and you do not press any navigation keys for a period that is Defined by Display Timeout (Parameter 436), then the E300
Diagnostic Station will automatically return to the trip or warning screen if the trip or warning event is not cleared.
62 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Introduction
Device Modes
Chapter
4
System Operation and Configuration
This chapter provides instructions for operating and configuring an E300
Electronic Overload Relay system. Settings for Device Modes, Option Match,
Security Policy, I/O Assignments, Expansion Bus Fault, Emergency Start, and an introduction to Operating Modes are included in this chapter.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has five device modes to validate configuration of the device and limit when you can configure the E300
Electronic Overload Relay, perform a firmware update, and issue commands.
• Administration Mode
• Operation Mode
• Run Mode
• Test Mode
• Invalid Configuration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration Mode is a maintenance mode for the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay, which allows you to configure parameters, modify security policies, enable web servers (see
page 382 to enable the EtherNet/IP web server), perform
firmware updates, and issue commands.
Follow these steps to enter into Administration Mode:
1.
Set the rotary dials on the E300 Communication Module to the following values
– For EtherNet/IP set the rotary dials to 0-0-0
– For DeviceNet set the rotary dials to 7-7
2.
Cycle power on the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
After commissioning activities and maintenance tasks are completed, return the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay back to Operation or Run Mode by setting the rotary dials of the E300 communication module back to its previous positions and cycle power.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 63
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Operation Mode
Operation Mode is a standby mode for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay in which the E300 is ready to help protect an electric motor and no electrical current has been detected. You can modify configuration parameters, update firmware, and issue commands if the appropriate security policies are enabled.
The Power LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations will be flashing green and bit 14 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) is set to 1 when the device is in Operation Mode.
Table 19 - Operation Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
X
X
Function
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
X
X
X
X
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Run Mode
Run Mode is an active mode for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay in which the E300 is sensing electrical current and is actively protecting an electric motor.
Only non-motor protection configuration parameters can be modified if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the
Communication Module and Operator Stations will be solid green and bits 3, 4, and/or 5 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Run
Mode.
64 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 20 - Run Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
Function
X
X
X
X
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
X
X PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Test Mode
Test Mode is used by installers of motor control centers who are testing and commissioning motor starters with an automation system. A digital input of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay is assigned to monitor the motor control center enclosure’s Test Position. The Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) are described later in this chapter.
Anyone commissioning motor starters in an automation system can put their motor control center enclosure into the Test Position to activate Test Mode and verify that the digital inputs and relay outputs of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay are operating properly with the motor starter without energizing power to the motor. If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay senses current or voltage in Test
Mode, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay will generate a Test Mode Trip.
Invalid Configuration Mode
Invalid Configuration Mode is an active mode for the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay in which the E300 is in a tripped state due to invalid configuration data.
Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) indicates the parameter number that is causing the fault. Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) identifies the reason for Invalid Configuration Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 65
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Table 21 - Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39)
4
5
2
3
Code
0
1
Description
No Error
Value over maximum value
Value under minimum value
Illegal value
L3 Current detected (for single-phase applications)
CopyCat error
The Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations will be flashing a pattern of red, 3 long and 8 short blinks, and bits 0 and 2 in Device
Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Invalid Configuration
Mode.
Table 22 - Invalid Configuration Mode Bit Function Detail — Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Trip Present
Warning Present
X
X
X
X
Invalid Configuration
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Emergency Start Enabled
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
To return to Operation/Run Mode, place a valid configuration value in the parameter identified by Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and
Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39). Reset the trip state of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay by pressing the blue reset button on the
Communication Module, via network communications, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communications module, or by an assigned digital input.
Option Match
66
Due to the modular nature of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay, you can enable the Option Match feature to ensure that the options that were expected for the motor protection application are the ones that are present on the E300
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Electronic Overload Relay system. You can configure an option mismatch to cause a protection trip or provide a warning within the E300.
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186)
To enable the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Option Match feature to cause a protection trip in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of
Parameter 186 (Control Trip Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a protection trip in Parameter 233 (Option Match Action).
Table 23 - Enable Option Match Protection Trip Bit Function Detail— Control Trip Enable
(Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
X Test Trip Enable
PTC Trip Enable
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
Operator Station Trip Enable
Remote Trip Enable
Blocked Start Trip Enable
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
Configuration Trip Enable
Option Match Trip Enable
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
Expansion Bus Trip Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Ready
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 67
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192)
To enable the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Option Match feature to cause a warning in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of
Parameter 192 (Control Warning Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a warning in Parameter 233 (Option Match Action).
Table 24 - Enable Option Match Protection Warning Bit Function Detail— Control Warning
Enable (Parameter 192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
Reserved
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers six different control modules. Place the value of the expected control module into Parameter 221. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the control module.
Table 25 - Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1 6 Inputs, 24V DC / 3 Relay Outputs
Control Module Cat. No.
—
193-EIO-63-24D
2 4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 3 Relay Outputs
3 4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 3 Relay Outputs
193-EIO-43-120
193-EIO-43-240
4 4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC 193-EIOGP-42-24D
5 2 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC 193-EIOGP-22-120
6 2 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs / External Ground Fault / PTC 193-EIOGP-22-240
68 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers 12 different sensing modules. Place the value of the expected sensing module into Parameter 222. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the sensing module.
Table 26 - Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Code
0
1
Description
Ignore
Voltage / Current 0.5…30 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 6…60 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 10…100 A / Ground Fault
Voltage / Current 20…200 A / Ground Fault
Current 0.5…30 A / Ground Fault
Current 6…60 A / Ground Fault
Current 10…100 A / Ground Fault
Current 20…200 A / Ground Fault
Current 0.5…30 A
Current 6…60 A
Current 10…100 A
Current 20…200 A
Sensing Module Cat. No.
—
193-ESM-VIG-30A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-30A-__
193-ESM-VIG-60A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-60A-__
193-ESM-VIG-100A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-100A-__
193-ESM-VIG-200A-__ or 592-ESM-VIG-200A-__
193-ESM-IG-30A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-30A-__
193-ESM-IG-60A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-60A-__
193-ESM-IG-100A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-100A-__
193-ESM-IG-200A-__ or 592-ESM-IG-200A-__
193-ESM-I-30A-__ or 592--ESM-I-30A-__
193-ESM-I-60A-__ or 592--ESM-I-60A-__
193-ESM-I-100A-__ or 592--ESM-I-100A-__
193-ESM-I-200A-__ or 592--ESM-I-200A-__
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers two different communication modules. Place the value of the expected communication module into Parameter
223. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the communication module.
Table 27 - Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
EtherNet/IP with Dual Port Switch supporting DLR
DeviceNet
Communication Module Cat. No.
—
193-ECM-ETR
193-ECM-DNT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 69
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers two different types of operator stations. Place the value of the expected operator station into Parameter 224. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the operator station. A value of
(1), “No Operator Station” , makes the operator station not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an operator station to the E300
Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 28 - Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
3
No Operator Station (Operator Station Not Allowed)
Control Station
Diagnostic Station with LCD
Operator Station Cat. No.
—
—
193-EOS-SCS
193-EOS-SDS
Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital
I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 into Parameter 225. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 1 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 29 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
3
4
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
70 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital
I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 into Parameter 226. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 30 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
2
3
4
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital
I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 into Parameter 227. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 31 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
3
4
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 71
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital
I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 into Parameter 228. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Digital I/O Expansion Module ” , makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 4 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 32 - Digital I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
2
3
4
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
No Digital I/O Expansion Module (Digital I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
4 Inputs, 24V DC / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 110-120V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
4 Inputs, 220-240V AC 50/60Hz / 2 Relay Outputs
Digital I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1. There is one type of
Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 into Parameter 229. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 1 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 33 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
72 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2. There is one type of
Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 into Parameter 230. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 2 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 34 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3. There is one type of
Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 into Parameter 231. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 3 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 35 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
Code Description
0
1
2
Ignore
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 73
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4. There is one type of
Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 into Parameter 232. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1), “No Analog I/O Expansion Module” , makes the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 4 to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 36 - Analog I/O Expansion Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
Code Description
0 Ignore
1
2
No Analog I/O Expansion Module (Analog I/O Expansion
Module Not Allowed)
3 Universal Analog Inputs / 1 Analog Output
Analog I/O Expansion Module Cat. No.
—
—
193-EXP-AIO-31
Option Match Action (Parameter 233)
The Option Match feature for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to specify an action when there is an option mismatch – Protection Trip or
Warning. Place a (0) in the appropriate bit position for a warning, and place a
(1) in the appropriate bit position to cause a protection trip if there is an option mismatch.
Table 37 - Option Match Action (Parameter 233) Bit Function Detail
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Control Module Mismatch Action
X
X
X
Sensing Module Mismatch Action
Communication Module Mismatch
Action
Operator Station Mismatch Action
X Digital Module 1 Mismatch Action
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 2 Mismatch Action
Digital Module 3 Mismatch Action
Digital Module 4 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 1 Mismatch Action
X
X
X Analog Module 2 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 3 Mismatch Action
Analog Module 4 Mismatch Action
74 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Security Policy
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has a security policy that can be used to prevent anyone with malicious intent to potentially damage a motor or piece of equipment. By default, you can only modify the security policy when the E300
Electronic Overload Relay is in Administration Mode (see page 63
to learn how to enable Administration Mode).
Table 38 - Security Policy (Parameter 211) Bit Function Detail
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Device Configuration Enable
X
X Device Reset Enable
Firmware Update Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
X
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Security Policy Config Enable
Device Configuration Policy
The Device Configuration Policy allows you to send external message instructions via a communications network to write values to configuration parameters. When this policy is disabled, all external message instructions with configuration data will return a communications error when the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay is in Operation Mode or Run Mode.
Device Reset Policy
The Device Reset Policy allows you to send external message instruction via a communications network to perform a soft device reset when the E300
Electronic Overload Relay is in Operation Mode. When this policy is disabled, all external reset message instructions will return a communications error when the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is in Operation Mode or Run Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 75
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
I/O Assignments
76
Firmware Update Policy
The Firmware Update Policy allows you to update the internal firmware of the communication module and control module via ControlFlash when the E300
Electronic Overload Relay is in Operation Mode. When this policy is disabled, firmware updates will return a communications error when the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay is in Operation Mode or Run Mode.
Security Configuration Policy
The Security Configuration Policy allows you to modify the Security Policy of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay in Operation Mode. When this policy is disabled, the Security Policy can only be modified when the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay is in Administration Mode.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has native digital inputs and relay outputs in the Control Module. This I/O can be assign to dedicated functions. the following sections list the function assignments for the available Control
Module I/O.
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 39 - Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
0
1
2
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm
Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
0
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
13
6
7
4
5
Value
Table 40 - Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
Function as a digital input
Description
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
0
1
2
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
Value
Table 41 - Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 77
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
78
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 42 - Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
0
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
13
6
7
4
5
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
Function as a digital input
Description
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
Table 43 - Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
0
1
2
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
11
12
13
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201) allows you to assign this digital input for the following functions:
0
1
2
3
10
11
8
9
12
13
6
7
4
5
Value
Table 44 - Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Test Mode
L1 Line Loss Arm
L2 Line Loss Arm
L3 Line Loss Arm
L1 L2 Line Loss Arm
L2 L3 Line Loss Arm
Function as a digital input
Description
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
Enable Test Mode monitoring
Activate L1 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L3 Line Loss Protection
Activate L1 and L2 Line Loss Protection
Activate L2 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1 and L3 Line Loss Protection
L1 L2 L3 Line Loss Arm Activate L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss Protection
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 79
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 45 - Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 enters into a tripped state the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes. The
Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or
L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or
L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or
L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1
Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2
Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3
Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
80 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 46 - Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
Monitor L2 Trip Relay
Monitor L3 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 enters into a tripped state the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes. The
Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or
L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or
L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or
L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1
Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2
Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3
Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 81
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204) allows you to assign this relay output for the following functions:
Table 47 - Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Assignment
Normal
Trip Relay
Control Relay
Trip Alarm
Warning Alarm
Monitor L1 Trip Relay
(1)
Monitor L1 Control Relay
Monitor L2 Control Relay
Monitor L3 Control Relay
Description
Function as a relay output
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 enters into a tripped state the Control Relay opens and remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a tripped state in which the relay closes. The Trip Alarm remains closed until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally open contact until the E300 is in a protection warning state in which the relay closes. The
Warning Alarm remains closed until the protection warning clears.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1 Under Current, L1 Over Current, or
L1 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2 Under Current, L2 Over Current, or
L2 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a normally closed contact until the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3 Under Current, L3 Over Current, or
L3 Line Loss in which the relay opens. The Trip Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L1
Under Current, L1 Over Current, or L1 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L2
Under Current, L2 Over Current, or L2 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
Function as a combination Normal and Trip Relay. The Control Relay is in a normally open state until the relay is commanded to close by communications or via a DeviceLogix program. When the E300 is in a tripped state for a L3
Under Current, L3 Over Current, or L3 Line Loss, the relay opens. The Control Relay remains open until a trip reset is issued.
(1) Requires Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher
Table 48 - Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209)
Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209) allows you to activate the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms when the assigned output relay is in an energized state.
Table 49 - Activate FLA2 with Output Relay (Parameter 209)
1
2
Value
0
3
Description
Disable
Pt00 Output
Pt01 Output
Pt02 Output
Expansion Bus Fault
82
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s expansion bus can be used to expand the
I/O capabilities of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay with the addition of digital and analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault allows you to have the E300 Electronic Overload Relay go into a Trip or Warning state when
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4 established Expansion Bus communications is disrupted between the Control
Module and any digital and analog expansion I/O modules.
The Expansion Bus Fault is used when the Option Match feature is not enabled for the digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault only monitors for communication disruptions between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. Expansion bus communication disruptions between the Control Module and Operator Station do not affect the
Expansion Bus fault.
Expansion Bus Trip
Expansion Bus Trip is enabled by setting Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) bit 10 to 1. When communications is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay will go into a tripped state in which the Trip/Warn LED on the
Communication Module and Operator station will blink a red 3 long and 11 short blinking pattern.
Table 50 - Expansion Bus Trip Bit Function Detail— Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
X Test Trip Enable
PTC Trip Enable
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
Operator Station Trip Enable
Remote Trip Enable
Blocked Start Trip Enable
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
Configuration Trip Enable
Option Match Trip Enable
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
Expansion Bus Trip Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Ready
Reserved
To return to Operation/Run Mode, verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all of the expansion modules. When all of the expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, reset the trip state of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communications, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communications module, or by an assigned digital input.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 83
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Expansion Bus Warning
Expansion Bus Warning is enabled by setting Control Warning Enable
(Parameter 192) bit 10 to 1. When communications is disrupted between the
Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300
Electronic Overload Relay will go into a warning state in which the Trip/Warn
LED on the Communication Module and Operator station will blink a yellow 3 long and 11 short blinking pattern.
Table 51 - Expansion Bus Warning Bit Function Detail— Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning Enable
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Operator Station Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
To return to Operation/Run Mode, verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all of the expansion modules. When all of the expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, the warning state of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay will automatically clear.
Emergency Start
In an emergency, it may be necessary to start a motor even if a protection fault or a communication fault exists. The trip condition may be the result of a thermal overload condition or the number of starts exceeded its configuration. These conditions can be overridden using the Emergency Start feature of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay.
IMPORTANT Activating Emergency Start inhibits overload and blocked start protection.
Running in this mode can cause equipment overheating and fire.
To enable the Emergency Start feature in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay set the Emergency Start Enable (Parameter 216) to Enable.
84 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 52 - Emergency Start (Parameter 216)
Value
0
1
Description
Disable
Enable
Configure one of the Ptxx Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) to
Emergency Start and activate the corresponding digital input.
0
1
2
3
4
5
Table 53 - Emergency Start Input PTXX Assignment (Parameters 196…201)
Value Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
You can also use a network command to activate the Emergency Start feature. For the EtherNet/IP communications module, you would set the Emergency Start
When the Emergency Start feature is active, the following actions occur in the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay:
• Protection trips are ignored
• Output relays configured as Trip Relays are put into closed state
• Normal operation resumes with any Normal or Control Relay assigned output relay
• The Emergency Start Active bit is set to 1 in Device Status 0
(Parameter 20) bit 6
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 85
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Table 54 - Emergency Start Bit Function Detail— Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
X
X
Function
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
X
X
X
X
Current Present
GFCurrent Present
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Intern Ground Fault Sensing Present
Extern Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing
Ready
Reserved
Diagnostic Station Userdefined Screens
86
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Diagnostic Station has four user-defined screens that are part of the Diagnostic Station’s display sequence in which you can define up to two parameters per screen.
User-defined Screen 1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 1 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 428) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 1. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 55 - Screen 1 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 428)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
1
0
560
UINT
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 1 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 429) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 1. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 56 - Screen 1 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 429)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
50
0
560
1
UINT
2
User-defined Screen 2
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 2 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 430) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 2. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 57 - Screen 2 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 430)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
2
0
560
UINT
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 2 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 431) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 2. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 58 - Screen 2 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 431)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
3
0
560
UINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 87
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
88
User-defined Screen 3
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 3 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 432) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 3. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 59 - Screen 3 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 432)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
51
0
560
UINT
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 3 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 433) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 3. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 60 - Screen 3 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 433)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
52
0
560
UINT
User-defined Screen 4
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 4 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 434) is the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 4. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Table 61 - Screen 4 - Parameter 1 (Parameter 434)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
38
0
560
1
UINT
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 4 - Parameter 2 (Parameter 435) is the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 4. You can select one of the 560 available E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameters.
Screen
4
‐
Parameter
2
(Parameter
435)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
39
0
560
UINT
Display Timeout
Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines the time duration in which there is no display navigation activity, and the E300 Diagnostic Station returns to its normal display sequence. Any configuration parameters that were left in an edit state will be canceled. A value of zero disables the display timeout function.
Table 62 - Display Timeout (Parameter 436)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
300
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 89
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog I/O Expansion
Modules
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports up to four Analog I/O Expansion
Modules on the E300 Expansion Bus. The E300 Analog Expansion Module has three independent universal inputs and one analog output.
Analog Input Channels
The universal analog inputs can accept the following analog signals:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
• Voltage
– 0…10V DC
– 1…5V DC
– 0…5V DC
• 2-Wire or 3-Wire RTD Sensors
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 385
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 3916
– 10 Ω Cu 426
– 100 Ω Ni 618
– 120 Ω Ni 672
– 604Ω NiFe 518
• Resistance
– 0…150 Ω
– 0…750 Ω
– 0…3000 Ω
– 0…6000 Ω (PTC and NTC Sensors)
The analog inputs can report data in four different formats. Table 63 through
Table 66 display the data ranges for all of the available analog input types for the
four available data formats.
Table 63 - Analog Input Data Format for Current Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
4.00 mA
3.00 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Engineering
Units
21000
20000
4000
3000
21000
20000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
2100
2000
400
300
2100
2000
0
0
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
17407
16383
0
-1024
17202
16383
0
0
90 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 64 - Analog Input Data Format for Voltage Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5V DC
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
5000
1000
500
5250
5000
0
0
Engineering
Units
10500
10000
0
0
5250
500
100
50
525
500
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1050
1000
0
0
525
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
PID
17202
16383
0
0
17407
16383
0
-2048
17202
16383
0
0
Input Range Input Value Condition
850.0 °C
850.0 °C
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 385
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1562.0 °F
1562.0 °F
-328.0 °F
-328.0 °F
630.0 °C
630.0 °C
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω
Pt 3916
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1166.0 °F
1166.0 °F
RTD
10 Ω Cu 426
-328.0 °F
-328.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
RTD
100 Ω Ni 618
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Table 65 - Analog Input Data Format for RTD Input Type
-100
-100
500
500
-148
-148
260
260
-148
-148
-100
-100
500
500
-328
-328
260
260
-200
-200
1166
1166
-328
-328
630
630
Engineering
Units x 10
850
850
-200
-200
1562
1562
-1480
-1480
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-1480
-1480
-3280
-3280
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-3280
-3280
6300
6300
-2000
-2000
11660
11660
Engineering
Units
8500
8500
-2000
-2000
15620
15620
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
PID
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 91
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
92
Input Range Input Value Condition
RTD
120 Ω Ni 672
RTD
100 Ω NiFe
518
-112.0 °F
200.0 °C
200.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
392.0 °F
392.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-80.0 °C
-80.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-112.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
5000
-1120
-1120
2000
2000
-1000
-1000
3920
Engineering
Units
2600
2600
-800
-800
5000
3920
-1480
-1480
200
-100
-100
392
500
-112
-112
200
Engineering
Units x 10
260
260
-80
-80
500
392
-148
-148
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Table 66 - Analog Input Data Format for Resistance Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
Resistance
0-150 Ω
Resistance
0-750 Ω
Resistance
0-3000 Ω
Resistance
0-6000 Ω
(PTC / NTC)
150.00 Ω
150.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
750.0 Ω
750.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
6000 Ω
6000 Ω
0 Ω
0 Ω
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
7500
0
0
30000
30000
0
0
Engineering
Units
15000
15000
0
0
7500
6000
6000
0
0
750
0
0
3000
3000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1500
1500
0
0
750
600
600
0
0
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
PID
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
Analog Output Channel
The isolated analog output can be programmed to provide one of the following analog output signal types:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
• Voltage
– 0…10V DC
– 1…5V DC
– 0…5V DC
The analog outputs can report data as a percent of range. Table 67 and Table 68
display the data ranges for all of the available analog output types.
Table 67 - Analog Output Data Format for Current Output Type
Output Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Output Signal
21.000 mA
20.000 mA
4.000 mA
3.000 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Table 68 - Analog Output Data Format for Voltage Output Type
Output Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5 V DC
Output Value
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
The analog output can be used to communicate E300 diagnostic information via an analog signal to distributed control systems, programmable logic controllers, or panel-mounted analog meters. The analog output can represent one of the following E300 diagnostic parameters:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 93
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Output Selection
Average % FLA
Scaled Average % FLA
% TCU
Ground Fault Current
Internal, 0.50…5.00 A
External, 0.02…0.10 A
External, 0.10…0.50 A
External, 0.20…1.00 A
External, 1.00…5.00 A
Current Imbalance
Average L-L Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Total kW
Total kVAR
Total kVA
Total Power Factor
User-defined Value
Table 69 - Analog Output Selection Type
Low Range
0%
0%
0%
0.50 A
0.02 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
1.00 A
0%
0V
0%
0 kW
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
-50% (Lagging)
-32768
94
High Range
100%
200%
100%
5.00 A
0.10 A
0.50 A
1.00 A
5.00 A
100%
(PT Primary) V
100%
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
+50% (Leading)
32767
Update Rate
Analog Input Channels
The performance for the input channels of the E300 Analog I/O Expansion
Module is dependent on the filter setting for each channel. The total scan time for the input channels of the module is determined by adding the conversion time for all enabled input channels.
Table 70 - Analog Input Channel Conversion Time
Input Type
Current, Voltage,
2-Wire RTD, Resistance
3-Wire RTD
Filter Frequency
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Conversion Time
153 ms
512 ms
65 ms
37 ms
306 ms
1024 ms
130 ms
74 ms
Example:
• Channel 00 is configured for a 3-wire RTD and 4 Hz filter (conversion time = 1024 ms).
• Channel 01 is configured for 17Hz voltage (conversion time = 153 ms).
• Channel 02 is configured for 62Hz current (conversion time = 65 ms).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module input channel scan time will be
1242 ms (1024+153+65).
Analog Output Channel
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module output channel update rate is 10 ms.
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 437) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 will be monitoring.
Table 71 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 437)
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
17
18
15
16
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 438) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 95
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
96
Table 72 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 438)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 439) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 73 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 439)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 440) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 74 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 440)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 441) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 75 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 441)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 442) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 76 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 442)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 446) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 1 will be monitoring.
Table 77 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 446)
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 447) defines the data format for howthe analog reading is reported.
Table 78 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 447)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 97
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 448) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 79 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 448)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 449) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 80 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 449)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 450) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 81 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 450)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 451) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 82 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 451)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 455) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 1 will be monitoring.
98 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 83 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 455)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 456) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 84 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 456)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0 …16383)
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 457) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 85 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 457)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 99
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
100
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 458) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 86 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 458)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 459) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 87 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 459)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 460) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 88 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 460)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 will be providing.
Table 89 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464)
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
1
2
Value
0
3
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 465) defines the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameter that Output Channel 00 will be representing.
Table 90 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 465)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
7
8
9
10
11
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0…100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768…32767)
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
466) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 91 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 466)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
467) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 92 - Analog Module 1 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 467)
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 101
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
102
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 468) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 will be monitoring.
Table 93 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 468)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 469) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 94 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 469)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768 - 32767)
Scaled for PID (0 - 16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 470) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 95 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 470)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 471) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 96 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 471)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 472) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 97 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 472)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 473) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 98 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 473)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 477) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 2 will be monitoring.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 103
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Value
0
1
Table 99 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 477)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 478) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 100 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 478)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 479) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 101 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 479)
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
104 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 480) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 102 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 480)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 481) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 103 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 481)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 482) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 104 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 482)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 486) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 2 will be monitoring.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 105
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Table 105 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 486)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 487) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 106 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 487)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768 …32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 488) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 107 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 488)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
106 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 489) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 108 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 489)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 490) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 109 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 490)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 491) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 110 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 491)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 464) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 will be providing.
Table 111 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 495)
3
4
5
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 107
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 496) defines the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameter that Output Channel 00 will be representing.
Table 112 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 496)
8
9
6
7
10
11
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0… PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0… 100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768… 32767)
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
497) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 113 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 497)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
498) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 114 - Analog Module 2 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 498)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
108 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 499) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 will be monitoring.
Table 115 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 499)
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 500) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 116 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 500)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0 …16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 501) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 109
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Table 117 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 501)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 502) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 118 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 502)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 503) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 119 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 503)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 504) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 120 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 504)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 508) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 3 will be monitoring.
110 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 121 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 508)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 509) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 122 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 509)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 510) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 123 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 510)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 111
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 511) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 124 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 511)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 512) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 125 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 512)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 513) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 126 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 513)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 517) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 3 will be monitoring.
112 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 127 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 517)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 518) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 128 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 518)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 519) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 129 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 519)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 113
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
114
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 520) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 130 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 520)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 521) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 131 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 521)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 522) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 132 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 522)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 526) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 will be providing.
Table 133 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 526)
3
4
5
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 527) defines the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameter that Output Channel 00 will be representing.
Table 134 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 527)
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
7
8
9
10
11
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0 …100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768 …+32767)
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
528) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 135 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 528)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
529) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Table 136 - Analog Module 3 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 529)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 115
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
116
Analog Module 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 530) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 will be monitoring.
Table 137 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Type (Parameter 530)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 531) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 138 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Format (Parameter 531)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 532) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Table 139 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit (Parameter 532)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 533) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 140 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 533)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 534) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 141 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State (Parameter 534)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 535) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 142 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 535)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 539) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 4 will be monitoring.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 117
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Table 143 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Type (Parameter 539)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 540) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 144 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Format (Parameter 540)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 541) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 145 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit (Parameter 541)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
118 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency (Parameter 542) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 146 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency (Parameter 542)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 543) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 147 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State (Parameter 543)
Value
0
1
2
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 544) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 148 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 544)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 119
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 548) defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 4 will be monitoring.
Table 149 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Type (Parameter 548)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
21
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
100Pt385
200Pt385
500Pt385
1000Pt385
100Pt3916
200Pt3916
500Pt3916
1000Pt3916
10Cu426
100Ni618
120Ni672
604NiFe518
150ohm
750ohm
3000ohm
6000ohm
Description
Disable the analog input
Read an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Read an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Read an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Read a 100 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 385 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 200 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 500 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 1000 Ω Pt 3916 RTD Sensor
Read a 10 Ω Cu 426 RTD Sensor
Read a 100 Ω Ni 618 RTD Sensor
Read a 120 Ω Ni 672 RTD Sensor
Read a 604 Ω NiFe 518 RTD Sensor
Read a resistance signal from 0…150 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…750 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…3000 Ω
Read a resistance signal from 0…6000 Ω. This setting can be used with PTC and NTC sensors.
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 549) defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported.
Table 150 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Format (Parameter 549)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
EngUnits
EngUnitsTimes10
RawProportional
ScaledForPID
Description
Engineering Units (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Engineering Units x 10 (mA, V, °C, °F, or Ω)
Raw / Proportional (-32768…+32767)
Scaled for PID (0…16383)
120 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 550) defines the temperate unit for RTD sensor readings.
Table 151 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit (Parameter 550)
Value
0
1
Assignment
DegreesC
DegreesF
Description
Report RTD Temperature Data in °C
Report RTD Temperature Data in °F
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 551) defines update rate for the analog module’s input channels.
Table 152 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency (Parameter 551)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Description
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 17 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 4 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 62 Hz
Analog to Digital Conversion Update Frequency of 470Hz
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 552) defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit. Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Table 153 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State (Parameter 552)
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Upscale
Downscale
Zero
Description
Reports the high limit of the input channel type
Reports the low limit of the input channel type
Reports zero
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 556) defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor.
Table 154 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable (Parameter 556)
Value
0
1
Assignment
3-Wire
2-Wire
Description
Scan a 3-wire RTD sensor
Scan a 2-wire RTD sensor
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 557) defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 will be providing.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 121
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
122
Table 155 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Type (Parameter 557)
3
4
5
1
2
Value
0
Assignment
Disabled
4To20mA
0To20mA
0To10Volts
1To5Volts
0To5Volts
Description
Disable the analog input
Provide an analog current signal from 4…20 mA
Provide an analog current signal from 0…20 mA
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…10 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 1…5 V DC
Provide an analog voltage signal from 0…5 V DC
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 558) defines the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay parameter that Output Channel 00 will be representing.
Table 156 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Selection (Parameter 558)
8
9
6
7
10
11
4
5
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
AveragePCTFLA
ScaledAvgPctFLA
PercentTCU
GFCurrent
CurrentImbalance
AvgLLVoltage
VoltLLImbalance
TotalkW
TotalkVA
Total kVAR
TotalPF
UserDLXData
Description
Average %FLA (0…100%)
Scaled Average %FLA (0…200%)
%TCU (0…100%)
Ground Fault Current (Ground Fault Type Range)
Current Imbalance (0…100%)
Average L-L Voltage (0…PT Primary)
Voltage Imbalance (0…100%)
Total kW (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVA (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total kVAR (0…FLA x PT Primary x 1.732)
Total Power Factor (-50% Lagging…+50% Leading)
User-defined Value (-32768…32767)
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
559) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault.
Table 157 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter 559)
2
3
Value
0
1
Assignment
Zero
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Provide an analog signal of zero
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the last known analog signal
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action (Parameter
560) defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output
Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
System Operation and Configuration Chapter 4
Figure 42 - Analog Module 4 – Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 560)
1
2
Value
0
3
Assignment
Ignore
Maximum
Minimum
HoldLastState
Description
Continue providing the appropriate analog signal
Provide an analog signal equal to the high limit
Provide an analog signal equal to the low limit
Provide the analog signal at the time of the fault
Introduction to Operating
Modes
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay supports a number of Operating Modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-Reversing Starter
• Reversing Starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
• Two-Speed Starter
• Monitor
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay is Overload (Network) in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can use network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays or Control
Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be configured as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to
go into Invalid Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip. Operating
Modes on page 125 describes the functionality of the available Operating Modes
for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay and their associated configuration rules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 123
Chapter 4 System Operation and Configuration
Notes:
124 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Chapter
5
Operating Modes
Introduction
Overload (Network)
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports up to 54 Operating Modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-Reversing Starter
• Reversing Starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
• Two Speed Starter
• Monitoring Device
This chapter explains the configuration rules, logic, and control wiring that is required for the available Operating Modes (Parameter 195). Failure to follow the configuration rules causes the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to go into
Invalid Configuration Mode and trip the E300 Electronic Overload Relay on a configuration trip.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is Overload (Network) in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed Trip Relay. You can use network commands to control the remaining output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays.
Rules
1.
For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay.
2.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx
Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
3.
Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with
one of the output relays configured as a normally closed Trip Relay. Figure 43 is a
wiring diagram of a Non-Reversing Starter. Relay 0 is configured as a Trip Relay,
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 125
Chapter 5 Operating Modes and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open Normal Relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Figure 43 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 1
R13 R14
A1
M
A2
Relay 0
Configured as a
Trip Relay
1
R03 R04
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay can also be wired as a Control Relay in which the relay that is controlled by
the communications network opens when a trip event is present. Figure 44 is a
wiring diagram of a Non-Reversing Starter with Relay 0 configured as a Control
Relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 44 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0
Configured as a
Control Relay
1
R03 R04
A1
M
A2
1
Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
126 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Monitor (Custom)
Operating Modes Chapter 5
Timing Diagram
Figure 45 - Timing Diagram
Trip Relay or
Control Relay
Device
Status0.Trip
Present
Trip Reset
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Monitor (Custom) Operating Mode allows you to use the E300 Electronic Overload Relay as a monitoring device. No configuration rules apply in this operating mode if the motor protection features are disabled.
Rules
1.
If any protection trips are enabled (excluding Configuration, NVS, and
Hardware Fault trip), then set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to the appropriate value of Trip Relay, Control
Relay, Monitor Lx Trip Relay, or Monitor Lx Control Relay.
Wiring Diagram
Not Applicable
Timing Diagram
Not Applicable
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 127
Chapter 5 Operating Modes
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter
6
Introduction
This chapter provides detailed information about the protective trip and warning functions of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay. The protective trip and warning functions are organized into five sections:
• Current-based
• Voltage-based
• Power-based
• Control-based
• Analog-based
This chapter explains the trip and warning protection features of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay and the associated configuration parameters.
Current-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay digitally monitors the electrical current that is consumed by an electric motor. This electric current information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
• Overload Trip/Warning
• Phase Loss Trip
• Ground Fault Trip/Warning
• Stall Trip
• Jam Trip/Warning
• Underload Trip/Warning
• Current Imbalance Trip/Warning
• Line Under Current Trip/Warning
• Line Over Current Trip/Warning
• Line Loss Trip/Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 129
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183) and Current Warning Enable (Parameter
189) are used to enable the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 158 - Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X Phase Loss Trip
X Ground Fault Trip
X Stall Trip
X Jam Trip
X Underload Trip
X Current Imbalance Trip
X L1 Under Current Trip
X L2 Under Current Trip
X L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X L2 Over Current Trip
X
X
L3 Over Current Trip
L1 Line Loss Trip
X L2 Line Loss Trip
X L3 Line Loss Trip
Table 159 - Current Warning Enable (Parameter 189)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Overload Warning
Reserved
Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
Jam Warning
Underload Warning
Current Imbalance Warning
L1 Under Current Warning
L2 Under Current Warning
L3 Under Current Warning
L1 Over Current Warning
L2 Over Current Warning
L3 Over Current Warning
L1 Line Loss Warning
L2 Line Loss Warning
L3 Line Loss Warning
130 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) and Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 160 - Current Trip Status (Parameter 4)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X Phase Loss Trip
X
X
Ground Fault Current Trip
Stall Trip
X Jam Trip
X
X
Underload Trip
Current Imbalance Trip
X L1 Under Current Trip
X
X
L2 Under Current Trip
L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X
X
L2 Over Current Trip
L3 Over Current Trip
X L1 Line Loss Trip
X
X
L2 Line Loss Trip
L3 Line Loss Trip
Table 161 - Current Warning Status (Parameter 10)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
Reserved
X Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
X Jam Warning
X Underload Warning
X Current Imbalance Warning
X L1 Under Current Warning
X L2 Under Current Warning
X L3 Under Current Warning
X L1 Over Current Warning
X L2 Over Current Warning
X L3 Over Current Warning
X L1 Line Loss Warning
X L2 Line Loss Warning
X L3 Line Loss Warning
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 131
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
132
Overload Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides overload protection through true
RMS current measurements of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the highest current measured, the programmed FLA Setting, and Trip Class, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated. Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) reports this calculated value and can be read via the communications network.
Overload Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an overload indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Overload trip protection is enabled
• Current is present
• % Thermal Capacity Utilized reaches 100%
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an overload, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red short-1 blink pattern,
• Bit 0 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Full Load Amps Setting
FLA (Parameter 171) is one of two parameters that affect the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay’s thermal capacity utilization algorithm. you enters the motor’s full-load current rating into this parameter.
Table 162 - FLA (Parameter 171)
FLA (Parameter 171)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.50 (0.5…30 A Sensing Modules)
6.00 (6…60 A Sensing Modules)
10.00 (10…100 A Sensing Modules)
20.00 (20…200 A Sensing Modules)
0.50
65535.00
UDINT
4
100
Amps
FLA2 (Parameter 177) is provided for programming the high-speed FLA value in
two-speed motor applications. Activating FLA2 is described in Chapter 4
.
Table 163 - FLA2 (Parameter 177)
FLA2 (Parameter 177)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.50 (0.5…30 A Sensing Modules)
6.00 (6…60 A Sensing Modules)
10.00 (10…100 A Sensing Modules)
20.00 (20…200 A Sensing Modules)
0.50
65535.00
UDINT
4
100
Amps
USA and Canada Guidelines
• Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of
1.15 or greater, program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
• Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15, program the FLA setting to 90% of the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
• Wye-Delta (Y-Δ) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 133
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Outside USA and Canada Guidelines
• Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
• Star-Delta (Y-Δ) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Trip Class
Trip Class is the second of two parameters that affect the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay’s thermal capacity utilization algorithm. Trip class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay offers an adjustable trip class range of 5…30. Enter the application trip class into Trip Class (Parameter 172).
Table 164 - Trip Class (Parameter 172)
Trip Class (Parameter 172)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
5
30
1
1
USINT
Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s timecurrent characteristics for trip classes 5, 10, 20, and 30.
134 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Figure 46 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, and 30
Trip Class 10
1000
Trip Class 5
1000
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
100
100
10 10
1
100% Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 20
10000
1000
1000%
1
100%
10000
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1000%
1000
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
1
100% Current (% FLA) 1000%
For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the
Class 10 trip time according to the following table:
Table 165 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Trip Class
9
10
11
12
13
7
8
5
6
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
0.5
0.6
Trip Class
18
19
20
21
22
14
15
16
17
2.0
2.1
2.2
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
1.4
1.5
Trip Class
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
2.3
2.4
2.9
3.0
Automatic/Manual Reset
Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) allows you to select the reset mode for the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay automatically resets when the value stored in % Thermal
Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) falls below the value stored in Overload Reset
Level (Parameter 174). If manual reset mode is selected, the E300 Overload
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 135
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Relay can be manually reset after the % Thermal Capacity Utilized is less than the
OL Reset Level.
Table 166 - Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173)
Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Manual
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
BOOL
Table 167 - Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174)
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
75
0
100
USINT
1
1
%TCU
136 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174) is adjustable from 1 to 100% TCU. The following figures illustrate the typical overload reset time delay when Overload
Reset Level is set to 75% TCU.
Figure 47 - Overload Reset Times
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Time to Reset in Seconds
100
90
80
70
60
50
0
Trip Class 5
100 200 300
Time to Reset in Seconds
400 500
Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30
ATTENTION: In explosive environment applications, Overload Reset Mode
(Parameter 173) must be set to Manual.
ATTENTION: In an explosive environment application Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174) must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor thermal time constant.
Overload Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an overload warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Overload warning is enabled
• Current is present
• % Thermal Capacity Utilized is equal to or greater than Overload Warning
Level
When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow short-1 blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 137
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as Warning Alarm close
Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175) can be used as an alert for an impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU.
Table 168 - Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175)
Overload Warning Level (Parameter 175)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
85
0
100
1
USINT
1
%TCU
Time to Trip
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay, Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
Table 169 - Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
9999
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Time To Reset
After an overload trip, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through Overload Time to Reset
(Parameter 3). When the % Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the
Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
138 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 170 - Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Nonvolatile Thermal Memory
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay includes a nonvolatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit corresponds to a Trip Class 20 setting. During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is continuously monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal capacity utilization of the connected motor. If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to the cooling of a Trip Class 20 application. When the power is re-applied, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay checks the thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Thermal Capacity
Utilized (Parameter 1).
Phase Loss Protection
A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings.
Rapid phase loss detection helps to minimize the potential damage and loss of production.
Phase Loss Inhibit Time
Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239) allows you to inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 171 - Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239)
Phase Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 239)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 139
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
140
IMPORTANT The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss condition until the Phase Loss Inhibit Time expires.
Phase Loss Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a phase loss indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Phase Loss Protection is enabled
• Current is Present
• Phase Loss Inhibit Time has expired
• Current Imbalance is equal to or greater than 100% for a time period greater than the programmed Phase Loss Trip Delay
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a phase loss, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashed a red short-2 blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Phase Loss Trip Delay
Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240) allows you to define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 172 - Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240)
Phase Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 240)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Ground Fault Current Protection
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low-level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely maintenance.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides core-balanced ground fault current detection capability, with the option of enabling Ground Fault Trip,
Ground Fault Warning, or both. The ground fault detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the E300 Sensing Module and Control
Module ordered.
Table 173 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Ground Fault Method
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
Range
Catalog Number
193-ESM-IG-__-__
592-ESM-IG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-EIOGP-22-___
193-EIOGP-42-___
Internal
External ➊
0.5…5.0 A
0.02…5.0 A
➊
One of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors must be used:
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 141
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
ATTENTION: The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupt or for personal protection as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.
ATTENTION: The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is used.
Ground Fault Type
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has two options available to measure ground fault current. Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241) allows you to select the internal option or the external option with the appropriate measurement range.
Table 174 - Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241)
Ground Fault Type (Parameter 241)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
1 = Internal 0.500…5.000 A
1 = Internal 0.500…5.000 A
2 = External 0.020…0.100 A
3 = External 0.100…0.500 A
4 = External 0.200…1.000 A
5 = External 1.000…5.000 A
USINT
Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the ground fault.
When enabled, Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit (Parameter 248), inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range of the core-balance sensor (approximately 6.5 A).
142 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 175 - Overload Reset Level (Parameter 248)
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 248)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
BOOL
1
1
Ground Fault Filter
An E300 Electronic Overload Relay can filter ground fault currents for High
Resistance Grounded (HRG) systems from its current-based protection trip and warning functions, which include:
• Thermal overload
• Current imbalance
• Jam
• Stall
The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor. Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 131) allows you to enable this filter.
Table 176 - Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 247
Ground Fault Filter (Parameter 247)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Disable
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
BOOL
1
1
This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the currentbased motor protection trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data is reported unfiltered when this feature is enabled.
Ground Fault Inhibit Time
Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242) allows you to inhibit a ground fault trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds. The ground fault inhibit time begins when the
Current Present (bit 3) or Ground Fault Current Present (bit 4) is set in Device
Status 0 (Parameter 20).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 143
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 177 - Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242
Ground Fault Inhibit Time (Parameter 242)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Table 178 - Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
Function
X Warning Present
X Invalid Configuration
X Current Present
X Ground Fault Current Present
X Voltage Present
X Emergency Start Enabled
X DeviceLogix Enabled
X Feedback Timeout Enabled
X Operator Station Present
X Voltage Sensing Present
X Internal Ground Fault Sensing
Present
X External Ground Fault Sensing
Present
X PTC Sensing
X Ready
Reserved
Ground Fault Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a ground fault indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Ground fault protection is enabled
• Ground fault current is present
• Ground Fault Inhibit Time has expired
• Ground Fault Current is equal to or greater than the Ground Fault Trip
Level for a time period greater than the Ground Fault Trip Delay
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a ground fault, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
144 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Bit 0 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Ground Fault Trip Delay
Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243) allows you to define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable from
0.0…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 145
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 179 - Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243)
Ground Fault Trip Delay (Parameter 243)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.5
0.0
25.0
1
USINT
10
Seconds
Ground Fault Trip Level
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244) allows you to define the ground fault current in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips and is adjustable from:
• 0.500…5.00 A (Internal)
• 0.020…5.00 A (External)
Table 180 - Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244)
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2.5
0.5 (internal); 0.02 (external)
5.00
UINT
2
100
Amps
IMPORTANT The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device or the ground fault current is greater than or equal to 50% of the minimum ground fault current rating of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a ground fault condition until the Ground Fault Current
Inhibit Time expires.
Ground Fault Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a ground fault warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Ground Fault Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Ground Fault Inhibit Time has expired
146 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Ground Fault Current is equal to or greater than the Ground Fault
Warning Level for a time period greater than the Ground Fault Warning
Delay.
When the ground fault warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 of Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Ground Fault Warning Level
Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246) allows you to define the ground fault current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning and is adjustable from 0.20…5.00 A.
Table 181 - Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246)
Ground Fault Warning Level (Parameter 246)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2.00
0.20
5.00
UINT
2
100
Amps
Ground Fault Warning Delay
Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245) allows you to define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be present before a warning occurs.
Table 182 - Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245)
Ground Fault Warning Delay (Parameter 245)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
25.00
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 147
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Stall Protection
A motor stalls when its inrush current lasts for a longer than normal period of time during its starting sequence. As a result, the motor heats up rapidly and reaches the temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor’s life, and minimize potential damage and loss of production. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its Stall Trip function and stop the motor before damage and loss of production can occur.
Stall Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a Stall Trip indication when:
• No trip currently exists
• Stall protection is enabled
• Current is present
• The maximum phase current is greater than the Stall Trip Level for a time period greater than the Stall Enabled Time
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a stall, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Current Trip Status Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
148 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Stall Enabled Time
Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) allows you to adjust the time the E300
Electronic Overload Relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 183 - Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249)
Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Stall Trip Level
Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250) allows you to define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 149
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
150
Table 184 - Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250)
Stall Trip Level (Parameter 250)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
600
100
600
2
UINT
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.
IMPORTANT The E300 Electronic Overload Relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor current transitions from 0A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
Jam Protection
A motor goes into a jam condition when a running motor begins to consume current greater than50% of the motor’s nameplate rating. An example of this condition could be an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear. These conditions can result in the overheating of the motor and equipment damage. The E300
Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its Jam Trip and
Warning function to detect for a rapid jam fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Jam Inhibit Time
Jam Inhibit Time (Parameter 251) allows you to inhibit a jam trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 185 ‐ Jam Trip Inhibit Time (Parameter 251)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Jam Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a jam indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Jam Trip is enabled
• Jam Inhibit Time has expired
• The maximum phase current is greater than the Jam Trip Level for a time period greater than the Jam Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a jam, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Jam Trip Delay
Jam Trip Delay (Parameter 252) allows you to define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 151
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
152
Table 186 - Jam Trip Delay (Parameter 252)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Jam Trip Level
Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) allows you to define the current at which the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a jam. It is user-adjustable from
50…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 187 - Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
250
50
600
UINT
2
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition until the Jam Inhibit Time expires.
Jam Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a Jam warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Jam Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Jam Inhibit Time has expired
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Jam Warning
Level
When the Jam Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Jam Warn Level
Jam Warn Level (Parameter 254) allows you to define the current at which the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
50…600% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 188 - Jam Warning Level (Parameter 254)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
150
50
600
UINT
2
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Jam
Inhibit Time has expired, the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.
Underload Protection
Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool. Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its
Underload Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid underload fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Underload Inhibit Time
Underload Inhibit Time (Parameter 255) allows you to inhibit an underload trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 189 - Underload Inhibit Time (Parameter 255)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 153
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
154
Underload Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an underload indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Underload Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Underload Inhibit Time has expired
• Minimum phase current is less than the Underload Trip Level for a time period greater than the Underload Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an underload, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Underload Trip Delay
Underload Trip Delay (Parameter 256) allows you to define the time period an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 190 - Underload Trip Delay (Parameter 256)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Underload Trip Level
Underload Trip Level (Parameter 257) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an underload. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 191 - Underload Trip Level (Parameter 257)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
50
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an underload condition until the Underload Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT For any given application, the practical limit of the Underload Trip Level
(Parameter 246) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s current measurement capability.
Underload Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an underload warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Underload Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Underload Inhibit Time has expired
• The minimum phase current is less than the Underload Warning Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 155
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
When the Underload Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Underload Warning Level
Underload Warning Level (Parameter 258) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 192 - Underload Warning Level (Parameter 258)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
70
10
100
1
USINT
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Underload Inhibit Time has expired, the Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.
Current Imbalance Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an imbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its
Current Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid current imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I d
/I a
)
where
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance
I d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Current
I a
= Average Current
156 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 259) allows you to inhibit a current imbalance trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Table 193 - Current Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 259)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Current Imbalance Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a current imbalance indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Current Imbalance Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
• The Current Imbalance (parameter 52) is greater than the Current
Imbalance Trip Level for a time period greater than the Current Imbalance
Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a current imbalance, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 157
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Current Imbalance Trip Delay
Current Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 260) allows you to define the time period a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Table 194 - Current Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 260)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
5.0
0.1
25.0
1
USINT
10
Seconds
Current Imbalance Trip Level
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a current imbalance. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
158 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 195 - Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
35
10
100
USINT
IMPORTANT The Current Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a current imbalance condition until the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
Current Imbalance Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a current imbalance warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Current Imbalance Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
• The current imbalance (parameter 52) is greater than the Current
Imbalance Warning Level
When the Current Imbalance Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Current Imbalance Warning Level
Current Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 262) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
Table 196 - Current Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 262)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
20
10
100
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 159
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
160
IMPORTANT The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Current Imbalance
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Under Current Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is less than a specific level for a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for an undercurrent condition per phase with its Line Under Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid under current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Under Current Inhibit Time
Under Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 265) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Under Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 197 - Under Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 265)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
L1 Under Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L1 Under Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L1 Under Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is less than the L1 Under Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L1 Under Current Trip Delay.
• If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L1 Under Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 8-short blink pattern
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Bit 7 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Under Current Trip Delay
L1 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 266) allows you to define the time period an L1 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 198 - L1 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 266)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 161
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
162
L1 Under Current Trip Level
L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L1 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 199 - L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT For any given application, the practical limit of the L1 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 267) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s current measurement capability
L1 Under Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L1 Under Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• L1 Under Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is less than the L1 Under Current
Warning Level
When the L1 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 8-short blink pattern
• Bit 7 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L1 Under Current Warning Level
L1 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 268) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L1 Under
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
Table 200 - L1 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 268)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
40
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The L1 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Under Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L2 Under Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L2 Under Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is less than the L2 Under Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L2 Under Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L2 Under Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 163
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Under Current Trip Delay
L2 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 269) allows you to define the time period an L2 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 201 - L2 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 269)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L2 Under Current Trip Level
L2 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 270) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L2 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
164 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 202 - L2 Under Current Trip Level Parameter 270)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT For any given application, the practical limit of the L2 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 270) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s current measurement capability
L2 Under Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L2 Under Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• 2 Under Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• 2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is less than the L2 Under Current Warning
Level
When the L2 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L2 Under Current Warning Level
L2 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 271) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L2 Under
Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 165
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 203 - L2 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 271)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
40
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The L2 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Under Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L3 Under Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L3 Under Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is less than the L3 Under Current Trip Level for a time period greater than the L3 Under Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L3 Under Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
166 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
IMPORTANT L3 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 272) allows you to define the time period that an L3 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs.
It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds
Table 204 - L3 Under Current Trip Delay (Parameter 272)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L3 Under Current Trip Level
L3 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 273) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L3 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 167
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 205 - L3 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 273)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
35
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT For any given application, the practical limit of the L3 Under Current Trip Level
(Parameter 273) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s current measurement capability
L3 Under Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L3 Under Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• L3 Under Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is less than the L3 Under Current
Warning Level
When the L3 Under Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
L3 Under Current Warning Level
L3 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 274) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L3 Under
Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting
(Parameter 171).
168 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 206 - L3 Under Current Warning Level (Parameter 274)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
40
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The L3 Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Under Current
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Over Current Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is greater than a specific level for a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element. Such conditions could harm the power system over a period of time, which could lead to loss of production.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for an overcurrent condition per phase with its Line Over Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid over current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Over Current Inhibit Time
Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and
L3 Over Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 207 - Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
L1 Over Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L1 Over Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L1 Over Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 169
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is greater than the L1 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L1 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L1 Over Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Over Current Trip Delay
L1 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an L1 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
170 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 208 - L1 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 276)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L1 Over Current Trip Level
L1 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 277) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L1 Over Current. It is useradjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 209 - L1 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 277)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L1 Over Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L1 Over Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• 1 Over Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• 1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is greater than the L1 Over Current
Warning Level
When the L1 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 171
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
L1 Over Current Warning Level
L1 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 278) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L1 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter
171).
Table 210 - L1 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 278)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The L1 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Over Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L2 Over Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• 2 Over Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• 2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is greater than the L2 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L2 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L2 Over Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
172 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Over Current Trip Delay
L2 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 279) allows you to define the time period an L2 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 211 - L2 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 279)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L2 Over Current Trip Level
L2 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 280) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L2 Over Current. It is useradjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 173
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
174
Table 212 - L2 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 280).
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
1
USINT
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L2 Over Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L2 Over Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• 2 Over Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• 2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is greater than the L2 Over Current
Warning Level
When the L2 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
L2 Over Current Warning Level
L2 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 281) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L2 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter
171).
Table 213 - L2 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 281)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
.
IMPORTANT The L2 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Over Current Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L3 Over Current indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L3 Over Current Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is greater than the L3 Over Current Trip
Level for a time period greater than the L3 Over Current Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L3 Over Current, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 13-short blink pattern
• Bit 12 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 175
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
176
L3 Over Current Trip Delay
L3 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 282) allows you to define the time period an L3 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 214 - L3 Over Current Trip Delay (Parameter 282)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
L3 Over Current Trip Level
L3 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 283) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L3 Over Current. It is useradjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
Table 215 - L3 Over Current Trip Level (Parameter 283)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
L3 Over Current Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L3 Over Current warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• L3 Over Current Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• The Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired
• L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is greater than the L3 Over Current
Warning Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
When the L2 Over Current Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 13-short blink pattern
• Bit 12 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
L3 Over Current Warning Level
L3 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 284) allows you to define the current at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a L3 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter
171).
Table 216 - L3 Over Current Warning Level (Parameter 284)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
10
100
USINT
1
1
%FLA
IMPORTANT The L3 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Current Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Loss Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is 0 amps a specific phase, this may indicate an electrical malfunction such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for a current-based line loss per phase with its Line Loss Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid line loss in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Line Loss Inhibit Time
Line Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 285) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3
Line Loss trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 177
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 217 - Line Loss Inhibit Time (Parameter 285)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
L1 Line Loss Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L1 Line Loss indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L1 Over Current Trip is enabled
• L1 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is
• equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L1 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L1 Line Loss, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 14-short blink pattern
• Bit 13 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
178 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an
L1 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 218 - L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 286)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for
Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L1 Line Loss Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L1 Line Loss warning if:
• No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 179
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• L1 Line Loss Warning is enabled
• L1 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) is equal to 0%
When the L1 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 14-short blink pattern
• Bit 13 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
IMPORTANT The L1 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
L2 Line Loss Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L2 Line Loss indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L2 Over Current Trip is enabled
• L2 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L2 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L2 Line Loss, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 15-short blink pattern
• Bit 14 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
180 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 287) allows you to define the time period an
L2 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 219 - L2 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 287)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for
Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L2 Line Loss Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L2 Line Loss warning if:
• No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 181
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• L2 Line Loss Warning is enabled
• L2 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) is equal to 0%
When the L2 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 15-short blink pattern
• Bit 14 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
IMPORTANT The L2 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L2 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
L3 Line Loss Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a L3 Line Loss indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• L3 Over Current Trip is enabled
• L3 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is equal to 0% for a time period greater than the L3 Line Loss Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a L3 Line Loss, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 16-short blink pattern
• Bit 15 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
182 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 288) allows you to define the time period an
L3 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 220 - L3 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 288)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
IMPORTANT The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters
196-201). The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for
Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
L3 Line Loss Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an L3 Line Loss warning if:
• No warning currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 183
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• L3 Line Loss Warning is enabled
• L3 Line Loss is activated via the appropriately programmed digital input
(see Input Assignments, Parameters 196…201, in
• Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired
• L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) is equal to 0%
When the L3 Line Loss Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 16-short blink pattern
• Bit 15 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
IMPORTANT The L3 Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L3 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
Voltage-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can digitally monitor the voltage supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor voltage quality. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high, too low, or wrong rotation. The following E300 Sensing Modules provide voltage monitoring capabilities.
Table 221 - Voltage Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method
Internal
Internal
External
L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
20…800V
20…800V
20…6500V
This voltage information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
• Undervoltage trip/warning
• Overvoltage trip/warning
• Voltage imbalance trip/warning
• Phase rotation mismatch trip
• Under frequency trip/warning
• Over frequency trip/warning
Voltage Trip Enable (Parameter 184) and Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter
190) are used to enable the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
184 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 222 - Voltage Trip Enabled (Parameter 184)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X Over Voltage Trip
X Voltage Imbalance Trip
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
X Under Frequency Trip
X Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 223 - Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter 190)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Warning
X Over Voltage Warning
X Voltage Imbalance Warning
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
X Under Frequency Warning
X Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) and Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) are used to view the status of the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 185
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 224 - Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X Over Voltage Trip
X Voltage Imbalance Trip
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
X Under Frequency Trip
X Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 225 - Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Warning
X Over Voltage Warning
X Voltage Imbalance Warning
X Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
X Under Frequency Warning
X Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
186 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Under Voltage Protection
Electric motors consume more electric current when the voltage supplied to the motor is lower than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its Under Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for low voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Under Voltage Inhibit Time
Under Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 355) allows you to inhibit an under voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 226 - Under Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 355)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under Voltage Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an undervoltage indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under Voltage Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Under Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
• The minimum phase voltage is less than the Under Voltage Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Voltage Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under voltage, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 187
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Voltage Trip Delay
Under Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 356) allows you to define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 227 - Under Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 356)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Voltage Trip Level
Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under voltage. It is useradjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
188 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 228 - Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
100.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
IMPORTANT The Under Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under voltage condition until the Under Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
Under Voltage Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under Voltage warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under Voltage Warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Under Voltage
• Inhibit Time has expired
• The minimum phase voltage is equal to or less than the Under Voltage
Warning Level
When the Under Voltage Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Voltage Warn Level
Under Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 358) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Table 229 - Under Voltage Warn Level
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
400.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 189
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
190
IMPORTANT The Under Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Under Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over Voltage Protection
The winding insulation for electric motors degrades faster when more voltage is supplied to the motor than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay can monitor for this condition with its Over Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for high voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Over Voltage Inhibit Time
Over Voltage Inhibit Time (Parameter 359) allows you to inhibit an over voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10.0
0.0
250.0
USINT
1
11
Seconds
Over Voltage Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over Voltage indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over Voltage Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
• The minimum phase voltage is greater than the Over Voltage Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Voltage Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over voltage, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Voltage Trip Delay
Over Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 360) allows you to define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 230 - Over Voltage Trip Delay (Parameter 360)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Voltage Trip Level
Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 357) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over voltage. It is useradjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 191
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
192
Table 231 - Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 361)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
500.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
IMPORTANT The Over Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over voltage condition until the Over Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
Over Voltage Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over Voltage warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over Voltage Warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired
• The maximum phase voltage is equal to or greater than the Over Voltage
Warning Level
When the Over Voltage Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Over Voltage Warn Level
Over Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 362) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
Table 232 - Over Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 362)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
490.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Over Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Voltage Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Voltage Imbalance Protection
A voltage imbalance can be caused by poor power quality and unequal distribution of power. When a voltage imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its Voltage Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid voltage imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%V
Imb
= 100% * (V d
/V a
) where
%V
Imb
= Percent Voltage Imbalance
V d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Voltage
V a
= Average Voltage
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 365) allows you to inhibit a voltage imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 233 - Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time (Parameter 365)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Voltage Imbalance Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a voltage imbalance indication if:
• No trip currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 193
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• Voltage Imbalance Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
• The Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) is greater than the Voltage
Imbalance Trip Level for a time period greater than the Voltage Imbalance
Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a voltage imbalance, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 366) allows you to define the time period a voltage imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
194 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 234 - Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay (Parameter 366)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 367) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a voltage imbalance. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
Table 235 - Voltage Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 367)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
15
10
100
USINT
IMPORTANT The Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a voltage imbalance condition until the Voltage Imbalance
Inhibit Time expires.
Voltage Imbalance Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a voltage imbalance warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Voltage Imbalance Warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired
• The Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) is greater than the Voltage
Imbalance Warning Level
When the Voltage Imbalance Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow red 1-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 195
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
196
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 368) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
Table 236 - Voltage Imbalance Warning Level (Parameter 368)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
10
10
100
USINT
IMPORTANT The Voltage Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Voltage Imbalance
Warning indication is instantaneous.
Phase Rotation Protection
Wiring of a three-phase voltage system can affect the rotational direction of an electric motor. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can help protect against the improper phase rotation so that an electric motor rotates in the proper direction,
ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from being damaged.
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time (Parameter 359) allows you to inhibit a phase rotation mismatch trip and warning from occurring. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 237 - Phase Rotation Inhibit Time (Parameter 363)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Phase Rotation Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a Phase Rotation indication if:
• No trip currently exists
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Phase Rotation Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Phase Rotation Inhibit Time has expired
• The measured Voltage Phase Rotation (Parameter 63) does not match the
• required Phase Rotation Type (Parameter 364).
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Phase Rotation Trip Type
Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 364) allows you to define the required voltage phase rotation for the motor application. E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch when this parameter does not match the measured voltage phase rotation. It is user-adjustable, ABC or ACB.
Table 238 - Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 364)
Default Value 1 = ABC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 197
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1 = ABC
2 = ACB
USINT
1
IMPORTANT The Phase Rotation Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for a phase rotation mismatch condition until the Phase Rotation Inhibit Time expires.
Frequency Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has the capability to help protect against poor voltage quality by offering frequency-based protection. This protection is used when electric power is provided by stand-alone electric generators. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage frequency is either too high or too low. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can monitor for this condition with its Over and Under Frequency Trip and Warning function, and it can detect for an improper voltage frequency to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Under Frequency Inhibit Time
Under Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 369) allows you to inhibit an under frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 239 - Under Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 369)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Frequency Inhibit Time
Over Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 373) allows you to inhibit an over frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
198 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 240 - Over Frequency Inhibit Time (Parameter 373)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under Frequency Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under Frequency indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under Frequency Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Under Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
• The voltage frequency is less than the Under Frequency Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Frequency Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under frequency, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 199
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Frequency Trip Delay
Under Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 370) allows you to define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 241 - Under Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 370)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Frequency Trip Level
Under Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 371) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under frequency. It is useradjustable from 46…65 Hz.
200 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 242 - Under Frequency Trip Level (Parameter 371)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
57
46
65
USINT
1
1
Hz
IMPORTANT The Under Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under frequency condition until the Under Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
Under Frequency Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under Frequency warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under Frequency Warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Under Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
• The voltage frequency is equal to or less than the Under Frequency
Warning Level
When the Under Frequency Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Frequency Warn Level
• Under Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 372) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
Table 243 - Under Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 372)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
58
46
65
USINT
1
1
Hz
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 201
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
202
Over Frequency Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over Frequency indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over Frequency Trip is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
• The voltage frequency is greater than the Over Frequency Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Frequency Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over frequency, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Frequency Trip Delay
Over Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 374) allows you to define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 244 - Over Frequency Trip Delay (Parameter 374)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Frequency Trip Level
Over Voltage Trip Level (Parameter 375) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over frequency. It is useradjustable from 46…65 Hz.
Table 245 - Over Frequency Trip Level (Parameter 375)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
Hz
63
46
65
USINT
IMPORTANT The Over Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from
0V to 20V L-L. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over frequency condition until the Over Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
Over Frequency Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over Frequency warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over Frequency Warning is enabled
• Voltage is present
• Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired
• The voltage frequency is equal to or greater than the Over Frequency
Warning Level
When the Over Frequency Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 203
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Over Frequency Warn Level
Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 46…65 Hz.
Table 246 - Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
Hz
62
46
65
USINT
IMPORTANT The Over Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature.
Once the Over Frequency Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Power-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can digitally monitor the power that is supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor power quality or alert you when power consumed by the motor differs from what is expected. This protection is useful for pump cavitation and pump material change detection.
The following E300 Sensing Modules provide power monitoring capabilities.
Table 247 - Power Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal
Internal
External
20…800V
20…800V
20…6500V
This power information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
• Under Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
• Over Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
• Under Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
• Over Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
• Under Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
• Over Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
• Under Power Factor Trip/Warning
• Over Power Factor Trip/Warning
204 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185) and Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191) are used to enable the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 248 - Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Trip
X Over kW Trip
X Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X Over kVAR Consumed Trip
X Under kVAR Generated Trip
X Over kVAR Generated Trip
X Under kVA Trip
X Over kVA Trip
X Under PF Lagging Trip
X Over PF Lagging Trip
X Under PF Leading Trip
X Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 249 - Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X Over kW Warning
X Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X Over kVAR Consumed Warning
X Under kVAR Generated Warning
X Over kVAR Generated Warning
X Under kVA Warning
X Over kVA Warning
X Under PF Lagging Warning
X Over PF Lagging Warning
X Under PF Leading Warning
X Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) and Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) are used to view the status of the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 205
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 250 - Power Trip Status (Parameter 6)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Trip
X Over kW Trip
X Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X Over kVAR Consumed Trip
X Under kVAR Generated Trip
X Over kVAR Generated Trip
X Under kVA Trip
X Over kVA Trip
X Under PF Lagging Trip
X Over PF Lagging Trip
X Under PF Leading Trip
X Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 251 - Power Warning Status (Parameter 12)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X Over kW Warning
X Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X Over kVAR Consumed Warning
X Under kVAR Generated Warning
X Over kVAR Generated Warning
X Under kVA Warning
X Over kVA Warning
X Under PF Lagging Warning
X Over PF Lagging Warning
X Under PF Leading Warning
X Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Real Power (kW) Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has the capability to help protect against real power (kW) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning ifthe real power
(kW) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
206 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Under kW Inhibit Time
Under kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 378) allows you to inhibit an under real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 252 - Under kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 378)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kW Inhibit Time
Over kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 382) allows you to inhibit an over real power
(kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 253 - Over kW Inhibit Time (Parameter 382)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kW Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under kW indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under kW Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kW Inhibit Time has expired
• The total real power (kW) is less than the Under kW Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kW Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under real power (kW), the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 207
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
208
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kW Trip Delay
Under kW Trip Delay (Parameter 379) allows you to define the time period an under real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 254 - Under kW Trip Delay (Parameter 379)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kW Trip Level
Under kW Trip Level (Parameter 380) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under real power (kW).
It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 255 - UnderkW Trip Level (Parameter 380)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT The Under kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under real power (kW) condition until the Under kW Inhibit Time expires.
Under kW Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under kW warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under kW Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kW Inhibit Time has expired
• The total real power (kW) is equal to or less than the Under kW Warning
Level
When the Under kW Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under kW Warn Level
Under kW Warn Level (Parameter 381) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 209
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 256 - Under kW Warn Level (Parameter 381)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT The Under kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kW Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over kW indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over kW Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kW Inhibit Time has expired
• The total real power (kW) is greater than the Over kW Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kW Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over real power (kW), the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
210 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kW Trip Delay
Over kW Trip Delay (Parameter 383) allows you to define the time period an over real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 257 - Over kW Trip Delay
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kW Trip Level
Over kW Trip Level (Parameter 384) allows you to define the total real power
(kW) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over real power
(kW). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 211
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
212
Table 258 - Over kW Trip Level (Parameter 384)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
IMPORTANT The Over kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over real power (kW) condition until the Over kW
Inhibit Time expires.
Over kW Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kW warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over kW Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kW Inhibit Time has expired
• The total real power (kW) is equal to or greater than the Over kW
Warning Level
When the Over kW Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kW Warn Level
Over kW Warn Level (Parameter 385) allows you to define the real power (kW) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is useradjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 259 - Over kW Warn Level
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Over kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Over kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has the capability to help protect against reactive power (kVAR) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the reactive power (kVAR) of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 386) allows you to inhibit an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 260 - Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 386)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 390) allows you to inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 261 - Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time (Parameter 390)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 213
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
214
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 394) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 262 - Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 394)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 398) allows you to inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) generated trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 263 - Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time (Parameter 398)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under kVAR Consumed indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under kVAR Consumed Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is less than the Under kVAR
Consumed Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVAR
Consumed Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed, the:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 387) allows you to define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 264 - Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 387)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 215
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
216
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 388) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 265 - Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 388)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under kVAR Consumed warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under kVAR Consumed Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is equal to or less than the
Under kVAR Consumed Warning Level
When the Under kVAR Consumed Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 389) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 266 - Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 389)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Under kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVAR ConsumedTrip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over kVAR Consumed indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over kVAR Consumed Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is greater than the Over kVAR
Consumed Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVAR
Consumed Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 217
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 399) allows you to define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 267 - Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay (Parameter 391)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 392) allows you to define the total reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over reactive power (kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
218 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 268 - Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level (Parameter 392)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over kVAR Consumed Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) consumed is equal to or greater than the
Over kVAR Consumed Warning Level
When the Over kVAR Consumed Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 269 - Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 219
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Over kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR
Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
Under kVAR Generated Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under kVAR Generated indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under kVAR Generated Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is less than the Under
• kVAR Generated Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) generated, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
220 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 395) allows you to define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 270 - Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 395)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 396) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under reactive power (kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 221
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 271 - Under kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 396)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVAR Generated Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under kVAR Generated warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under kVAR Generated Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is equal to or less than the
Under kVAR Generated Warning Level
When the Under kVAR Generated Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
222 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 272 - Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Under kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVAR Generated Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over kVAR Generated indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over kVAR Generated Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is greater than the Over
• kVAR Generated Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVAR
Generated Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over reactive power (kVAR) generated, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 223
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay (Parameter 399) allows you to define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 273 - Over kVAR Generated Trip Display (Parameter 399)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 400) allows you to define the total reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over reactive power (kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
224 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 274 - Over kVAR Generated Trip Level (Parameter 400)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
IMPORTANT The Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVAR Generated Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over kVAR Generated Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired
• The total reactive power (kVAR) generated is equal to or greater than the
Over kVAR Generated Warning Level
When the Over kVAR Generated Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 401) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 275 - Over kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 401)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 225
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
226
IMPORTANT The Over kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR
Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has the capability to help protect against apparent power (kVA) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under kVA Inhibit Time
Under kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 402) allows you to inhibit an under apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 276 - Under kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 402)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over kVA Inhibit Time
Over kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 406) allows you to inhibit an over apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 277 - Over kVA Inhibit Time (Parameter 406)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under kVA Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under kVA indication if:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• No trip currently exists
• Under kVA Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired
• The total apparent power (kVA) is less than the Under kVA Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under kVA Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA), the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under kVA Trip Delay
Under kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 403) allows you to define the time period an under apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 227
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
228
Table 278 - Under kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 403)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under kVA Trip Level
Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 279 - Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT The Under kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an under apparent power (kVA) condition until the
Under kVA Inhibit Time expires.
Under kVA Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under kVA warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under kVA Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired
• The total apparent power (kVA) is equal to or less than the Under kVA
Warning Level
When the Under kVA Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under kVA Warn Level
Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 280 - Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT The Under kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over kVA Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over kVA indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over kVA Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired
• The total apparent power (kVA) is greater than the Over kVA Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over kVA Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over apparent power (kVA), the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 8-short blink pattern
• Bit 7 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 229
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over kVA Trip Delay
Over kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 407) allows you to define the time period an over apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 281 - Over kVA Trip Delay (Parameter 407)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over kVA Trip Level
Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408) allows you to define the total apparent power (kVA) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
230 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 282 - Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
IMPORTANT The Over kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to
20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not begin monitoring for an over apparent power (kVA) condition until the
Over kVA Inhibit Time expires.
Over kVA Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kVA warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over kVA Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired
• The total apparent power (kVA) is equal to or greater than the Over kVA
Warning Level
When the Over kVA Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 8-short blink pattern
• Bit 7 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over kVA Warn Level
Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409) allows you to define the apparent power
(kVA) at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
Table 283 - Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2,000,000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 231
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Over kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Power Factor Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has the capability to help protect against power factor for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the power factor of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 410) allows you to inhibit an under power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 284 - Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 410)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 414) allows you to inhibit an over power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 285 - Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time (Parameter 414)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
232 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 418) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 286 - Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 418)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 422) allows you to inhibit an over power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Table 287 - Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time (Parameter 422)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
10
0
250
USINT
1
1
Seconds
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under Power Factor Lagging indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under Power Factor Lagging Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor lagging is less than the Under Power Factor Lagging
Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Power Factor Lagging
Trip Delay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 233
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
234
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under power factor lagging, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 411) allows you to define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 288 - Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 411)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 412) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 289 - Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 412)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
-90
-100
0
SINT
IMPORTANT The Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor lagging condition until the Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under Power Factor Lagging warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under Power Factor Lagging Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor lagging is equal to or less than the Under Power
Factor Lagging Warning Level
When the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 413) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 235
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 290 - Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 413)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
-95
-100
0
SINT
IMPORTANT The Under Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over Power Factor Lagging indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over Power Factor Lagging Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor lagging is greater than the Over Power Factor
Lagging Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Power Factor
Lagging Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over power factor lagging, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
236 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 415) allows you to define the time period an over power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 291 - Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay (Parameter 415)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 416) allows you to define the total power factor lagging at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 237
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
238
Table 292 - Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level (Parameter 416)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
-95
-100
0
1
%
SINT
1
IMPORTANT The Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor lagging condition until the Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over Power Factor Lagging Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor lagging is equal to or greater than the Over Power
Factor Lagging Warning Level
When the Over Power Factor Lagging Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 417) allows you to define the power factor lagging at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 293 - Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level (Parameter 417)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
-90
-100
0
1
%
SINT
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Over Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Over
Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Under Power Factor Leading indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Under Power Factor Leading Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor leading is less than the Under Power Factor Leading
Trip Level for a time period greater than the Under Power Factor Leading
Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under power factor leading, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 239
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 419) allows you to define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 294 - Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 419)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 420) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an under power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
240 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 295 -
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 420)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
100
0
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT The Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor leading condition until the Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Under Power Factor Leading Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Under Power Factor Leading warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Under Power Factor Leading Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor leading is equal to or less than the Under Power
Factor Leading Warning Level
When the Under Power Factor Leading Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 421) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 241
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 296 - Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 421)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
95
100
0
USINT
IMPORTANT The Under Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Over Power Factor Leading Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Over Power Factor Leading indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Over Power Factor Leading Trip is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor leading is greater than the Over Power Factor
Leading Trip Level for a time period greater than the Over Power Factor
Leading Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an over power factor leading, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
242 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 423) allows you to define the time period an over power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 297 - Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay (Parameter 423)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 424) allows you to define the total power factor leading at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on over power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 243
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
244
Table 298 - Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level (Parameter 424)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
95
100
0
1
%
USINT
1
IMPORTANT The Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor leading condition until the Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
Over Power Factor Leading Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Over kVAR warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Over Power Factor Leading Warning is enabled
• Current is present
• Voltage is present
• Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired
• The total power factor leading is equal to or greater than the Over Power
Factor Leading Warning Level
When the Over Power Factor Leading Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 425) allows you to define the power factor leading at which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
Table 299 - Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level (Parameter 425)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
90
100
0
1
%
USINT
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
I
IMPORTANT The Over Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Over
Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Control-Based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides a number of control-based protection functions including:
• Test Trip
• Operator Station Trip
• Remote Trip
• Start Inhibit
• Preventive Maintenance
• Configuration Trip
• Option Match Trip/Warning
• Expansion Bus Trip/Warning
• Non Volatile Storage Trip
• Test Mode Trip
Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) and Control Warning Enable (Parameter
192) are used to enable the respective control-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 300 - Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Test Trip Enable
X PTC Trip Enable
X
X
DeviceLogix Trip Enable
Operator Station Trip Enable
X Remote Trip Enable
X
X
Blocked Start Trip Enable
Hardware Fault Trip Enable
X Configuration Trip Enable
X
X
Option Match Trip Enable
Feedback Timeout Trip Enable
X Expansion Bus Trip Enable
X
X
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip Enable
Test Mode Trip Enable
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 245
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) and Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 301 - Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
Reserved
DeviceLogix Warning Enable
Operator Station Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning Enable
Feedback Timeout Warning Enable
Expansion Bus Warning Enable
Number Of Starts Warning Enable
Operating Hours Warning Enable
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table 302 - Control Trip Status (Parameter 7)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Test Trip
X PTC Trip
X
Function
DeviceLogix Trip
X Operator Station Trip
X Remote Trip
X Blocked Start Trip
X Hardware Fault Trip
X
X
Configuration Trip
Option Match Trip
X Feedback Timeout Trip
X Expansion Bus Trip
Reserved
X
X
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip
Test Mode Trip
Reserved
246 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 303 - Control Warning Status (Parameter 13)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning
DeviceLogix Warning
Operator Station Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning
Feedback Timeout Warning
Expansion Bus Warning
Number Of Starts Warning
Operating Hours Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Test Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Trip state. You can implement this feature when commissioning a motor control circuit to verify the response of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay, its associated Expansion I/O modules, and the networked automation system.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a test trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Test Trip protection is enabled
• You press the blue reset button on the Communication Module for more than 3 seconds.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a test trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 247
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
248
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Operator Station Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to plug and play its optional operator stations. The operator station protection feature trips the E300
Electronic Overload Relay when you press the red O (stop) button. This feature is a failsafe mechanism to allow you to de-energize a contactor coil anytime the red O (stop) button is pressed.
Operator Station Trip should be disabled when an operator station is being used to send start and stop signals to an automation control system.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an operator station trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Operator Station Trip is enabled
• You press the red O button on an operator station
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an operator station trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Remote Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to remotely cause the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to trip via a network command or assigned digital input on the Control Module (see
assignments). This feature allows the capability of tripping the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay from a remote source such as a vibration switch or external monitoring relay.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a remote trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Remote Trip is enabled
• A Control Module’s digital input with a remote trip assignment is activated or the Communication Module receives a remote trip command from the communications network
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a remote trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 249
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Start Inhibit Protection
This protective function allows you to limit the number of starts in a given time period and limit the operating hours for an electric motor. A start is defined as the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sensing a transition in current from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device. The Blocked Start protective function is set by Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) and/or Starts Interval
(Parameter 206).
Blocked Start Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a blocked start trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Blocked Start Trip is enabled
• The number of starts within the past hour equals the value set in Starts Per
Hour (Parameter 205)
• The time between starts is less than the value set in Starts Interval
(Parameter 206)
250 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a blocked start trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Starts Per Hour
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) is the number of starts within the last hour (60 minutes). This value is adjustable from 0…120 starts.
Table 304 - Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
0
120
USINT
1
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 251
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Starts Interval
Starts Interval (Parameter 206) is the time that you must wait between starts.
This value is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.
Table 305 - Starts Interval (Parameter 206)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
600
0
3600
2
UINT
1
Seconds
Starts Available
Starts Available (Parameter 30) reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Table 306 - Starts Available (Parameter 30)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0
0
120
USINT
Time to Start
Time to Start (Parameter 31) reports the amount of the time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Table 307 - Time to Start (Parameter 31)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
3600
UINT
2
1
Seconds
252 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Preventive Maintenance
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers preventive maintenance warnings based on the number of start cycles and the number of operating hours. These warnings can be used to alert you that the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached, and it is time to perform preventive maintenance.
Number of Starts Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay warns with a number of starts warning indication if:
• No warning currently exists
• Number of Starts Warning is enabled
• The value in Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is greater than the value set in
Total Starts (Parameter 207)
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay warns on a number of starts warning, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Total Starts
Total Starts (Parameter 207) allows you to set the number starts until the starts counter warning occurs.
Table 308 - Total Starts (Parameter 207)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Starts Counter
Starts Counter (Parameter 29) represents the number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter
165) function Clear Operating Statistics .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 253
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
254
Table 309 - Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
65535
UINT
Operating Hours Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay warns with an operating hours warning indication if:
• No warning currently exists
• Operating Hours Warning is enabled
• The value in Operating Time (Parameter 28) is greater than the value set in Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay warns on an operating hours warning, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 13-short blink pattern
• Bit 12 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Total Operating Hours
Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208) allows you to set the number operating hours that a motor can operate until the operating hours warning occurs.
Table 310 - Total Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Operating Time
Operating Time (Parameter 28) represents the number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Table 311 - Operating Time (Parameter 28)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Hardware Fault
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay continuously monitors the status of the
Control, Sensing, and Communication Modules. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay issues a hardware fault trip if there is an issue with the Control, Sensing, and Communications Modules or if one of the modules is missing or incompatible. The Hardware Fault Trip is always enabled.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a hardware fault trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Hardware Fault Trip is enabled
• An issue exists between the Control Module, Sensing Module, and/or
Communication Module
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a hardware fault trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 255
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
256
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Configuration Trip
See Invalid Configuration Mode in
for more information on
Configuration Trip.
Option Match
See Option Match in
Chapter 4 for more information on Option Match Trip and
Warning.
Expansion Bus Fault
See Expansion Bus Fault in
Chapter 4 for more information on Expansion Bus
Trip and Warning.
Nonvolatile Storage Fault
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay continuously monitors the status of its nonvolatile storage. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay issues a nonvolatile storage fault trip if there is an issue with its nonvolatile storage or if it becomes corrupt. The Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is always enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a hardware fault trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is enabled
• An issue exists in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s nonvolatile storage
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a nonvolatile storage fault trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 14-short blink pattern
• Bit 13 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Test Mode Trip
Some motor control center enclosures include a Test Position in which the motor power is disconnected from the enclosure, but the control power is still active.
This allows motor control center commissioning staff to verify that the motor starter is mechanically working and communications are established with the automation control system. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Mode Trip state if motor control
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 257
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions center enclosure is in a test position, and the E300 Electronic Overload Relay detects motor current and/or voltage is present.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with a test mode trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists.
• Test Mode Trip protection is enabled.
• The digital input that is assigned to read the Test Position feedback is active. See Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) in
.
• Motor current and/or voltage is present.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on a test mode trip, the following occurs:
• The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 15-short blink pattern
• Bit 14 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
IMPORTANT Motor current is detected when a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device
258 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Analog-based Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to trigger an over analog level Trip or Warning. The analog-based protection features can be used with the following analog applications:
• Monitoring motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by
RTD sensors
• Monitoring liquid, air, or steam flow
• Monitoring temperature
• Monitoring weight
• Monitoring levels
• Monitoring a potentiometer
• Monitoring PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187) and Analog Warning Enable (Parameter
193) are used to enable the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 312 - Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X
X
X
X
X
X
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X
X
X
X
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Trip
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 259
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 313 - Analog Warning Enable (Parameter 193)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Warning
Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) and Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) are used to monitor the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Table 314 - Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Trip
260 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 315 - Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Warning
Analog Module 1
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel
00 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel
00 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 261
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 443) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 316 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 443)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 444) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
262 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 317 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 444)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel
00 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
• Bit 0 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 445) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 318 -
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 445)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel
01 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 263
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel
01 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 452) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
264 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 319 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 452)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 453) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 320 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 453)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel
01 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 2-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 454) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 265
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 321 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 454)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 1 – Channel
02 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 1
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel
02 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
266 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 461) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 322 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 461)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 462) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 267
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
268
Table 323 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 462)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 1 – Channel
02 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 3-short blink pattern
• Bit 2 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 463) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 324 - Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 463)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel
00 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel
00 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 474) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 269
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
270 condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 325 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 474)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 475) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 326 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 475)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel
00 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 4-short blink pattern
• Bit 3 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 476) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 327 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 476)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel
01 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel
01 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 1 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 4 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 271
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 483) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 328 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 483)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 484) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
272 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 329 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 484)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel
01 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 5-short blink pattern
• Bit 4 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 485) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 330 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 485)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 2 – Channel
02 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 273
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 2 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 2
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel
02 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 492) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
274 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 331 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 492)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 493) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 332 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 493)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 2 – Channel
02 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 6-short blink pattern
• Bit 5 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 494) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 275
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 333 - Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 494)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 3
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel
00 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel
00 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
276 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 505) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 334 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 505)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 506) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 277
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
278
Table 335 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 506)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel
00 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 7-short blink pattern
• Bit 6 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 507) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 336 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 507)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel
01 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel
01 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 8-short blink pattern
• Bit 7 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 514) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 279
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
280
Table 337 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 514)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 515) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 338 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 515)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel
01 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 8-short blink pattern
• Bit 7 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 516) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 339 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 516)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 3 – Channel
02 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 3 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 3
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel
02 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 281
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 523) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 340 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 523)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 524) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
282 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Table 341 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 524)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 3 – Channel
02 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 9-short blink pattern
• Bit 8 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 525) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 342 - Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 525)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 283
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
284
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel
00 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 00 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel
00 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 536) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6 condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 343 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 536)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 537) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 344 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level (Parameter 537)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel
00 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 10-short blink pattern
• Bit 9 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm closes
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 538) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 285
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 345 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level (Parameter 538)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel
01 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip is enabled
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 01 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel
01 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
286 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 545) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Table 346 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 545)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 546) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 287
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
288
Table 347 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level (Parameter 546)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel
01 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 11-short blink pattern
• Bit 10 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 547) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 348 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level (Parameter 547)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips with an Analog Module 4 – Channel
02 Over Level Trip indication if:
• No trip currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip is enabled
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
• The measured analog input signal is greater than the Analog Module 4 –
Channel 02 Trip Level for a time period greater than the Analog Module 4
– Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay.
If the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel
02 Over Level, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
• Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
• Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
• Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their
Protection Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output
Relays, Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and
Digital Module 4 Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
• Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
• Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
• Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
• Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
• Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
• Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
• Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 554) allows you to define the time period an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 289
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Table 349 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay (Parameter 554)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1.0
0.1
25.0
USINT
1
10
Seconds
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 555) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 350 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level (Parameter 555)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay indicates an Analog Module 4 – Channel
02 Over Level warning if:
• No warning currently exists
• Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning is enabled
• The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog
Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
When the Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Warning conditions are satisfied, the:
• TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 12-short blink pattern
• Bit 11 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
• Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
• Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
290 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Protective Trip and Warning Functions Chapter 6
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 556) allows you to define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay trips on an Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level warning. It is useradjustable from -32768…+32767.
Table 351 - Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level (Parameter 556)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 291
Chapter 6 Protective Trip and Warning Functions
292 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Chapter
7
Commands
Introduction
Trip Reset
Configuration Preset
This chapter provides detailed information aboutthe resetting, clearing, and preconfiguration functions of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. The E300
Electronic Overload Relay provides three types of commands:
• Trip reset
• Configuration preset
• Clear command
Trip Reset (Parameter 163) allows you to reset an E300 Electronic Overload
Relay when it is in a tripped state. Trip Reset has the same functionality as pressing the blue reset button on E300 communication module and using the
Trip Reset bit in the consumed output assemblies of a communications network.
A trip reset can only be performed when all conditions for the trip event have been cleared. For an overload trip event, the % Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1) must be below the value that is specified in Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174).
Table 352 - Trip Reset (Parameter 163)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Trip Reset
USINT
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has a number of preset configurations that allow you to quickly configure all of the configuration parameters that are needed for a specific operating mode in one command. This also allows you to restore the factory default values for all configuration parameters in the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 293
Chapter 7 Commands
Table 353 - Config Preset (Parameter 164)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Factory Defaults
1
USINT
1
The following pages list the available configuration presets and the values for the associated pre-configured configuration values.
149
171
172
173
174
175
176
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
139 TripHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
Units
140
141
142
143
145
146
147
148
TripHistoryMaskV
TripHistoryMaskP
TripHistoryMaskC
TripHistoryMaskA
0x003F
0x0FFF
0x27FF
0x0FFF
WarnHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
WarnHistoryMaskV 0x003F
WarnHistoryMaskP
WarnHistoryMaskC
0x0FFF
0x1FFF
177
183
WarnHistoryMaskA 0x0FFF
FLASetting 0.50
Amps
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
OLResetLevel
OLWarningLevel
SingleOrThreePh
10 c
Automati
75
85
Three
Phase
%TCU
%TCU
FLA2Setting
TripEnableI
0.50
0x0003
Amps
Factory Defaults
When the Factory Defaults configuration preset command is selected, the E300
Electronic Overload Relay restores all configuration parameters back to their original factory default values.
Figure 48 - Factory Default Values
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
304 OutPt00PrFltAct Goto
Value
305 OutPt00PrFltVal Open
306
307
OutPt00ComFltAct
OutPt00ComFltVal
Goto
Value
Open
308 OutPt00ComIdlAct
Units
309
310
311
312
OutPt00ComIdlVal
OutPt01PrFltAct
OutPt01PrFltVal
OutPt01ComFltAct
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
313
314
OutPt01ComFltVal
OutPt01ComIdlAct
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
428 Screen1Param1 1
Units
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
Screen1Param2
Screen2Param1
Screen2Param2
Screen3Param1
Screen3Param2
Screen4Param1
3
51
52
38
50
2
Screen4Param2
DisplayTimeout
39
300
InAnMod1Ch00Type Disable
InAMod1Ch0Format Eng Units s
Second
315
316
317
318
319
OutPt01ComIdlVal
OutPt02PrFltAct
OutPt02PrFltVal
OutPt02ComFltAct
OutPt02ComFltVal
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
439
440
441
442
443
InAMod1C0TmpUnit Degrees C
InAMod1C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod1C0OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod1C0TripDly 1.0
s
Second
320
321
OutPt02ComIdlAct
OutPt02ComIdlVal
Goto
Value
Open
444
445
InAMod1C0TripLvl 0
InAMod1C0WarnLvl 0
294 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Commands Chapter 7
Number Parameter Name
184
185
186
187
189
190
191
192
193
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
211
212
213
214
215
216
221
TripEnableV
TripEnableP
TripEnableC
TripEnableA
WarningEnableI
WarningEnableV
WarningEnableP
WarningEnableC
WarningEnableA
SetOperatingMode
InPt00Assignment
InPt01Assignment
InPt02Assignment
InPt03Assignment
InPt04Assignment
InPt05Assignment
OutPt0Assignment * Trip Relay
OutPt1Assignment Normal
OutPt2Assignment Normal
StartsPerHour
StartsInterval
2
600 s
Second
PMTotalStarts
PMOperatingHours
0
0 Hrs
ActFLA2wOutput
SecurityPolicy
Language
FeedbackTimeout
TransitionDelay
InterlockDelay
Disable
0x801F
English
500
10000
100
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
350
352
353
EmergencyStartEn
ControlModuleTyp
0
0
0
0
Default
Value
0
Units
0
0x20C9
0
0
Net
Overload
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Disable
Ignore
333
334
335
336
337
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
322 OutDig1PrFltAct
323 OutDig1PrFltVal
Goto
Value
Open
324 OutDig1ComFltAct
Units
325
326
327
328
OutDig1ComFltVal
OutDig1ComIdlAct
OutDig1ComIdlVal
OutDigp2PrFltAct
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
329
330
OutDig2PrFltVal
OutDig2ComFltAct
Open
Goto
Value
Open 331
332
OutDig2ComFltVal
OutDig2ComIdlAct
OutDig2ComIdlVal
OutDig3PrFltAct
OutDig3PrFltVal
OutDig3ComFltAct
OutDig3ComFltVal
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
354
355
OuDig3ComIdlAct
OutDig3ComIdlVal
OutDig4PrFltAct
OutDig4PrFltVal
OutDig4ComFltAct
OutDig4ComFltVal
OutDig4ComIdlAct
OutDig4ComIdlVal
CommOverride
NetworkOverride
PtDevOutCOSMask
VoltageMode
PTPrimary
PTSecondary
UVInhibitTime
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Disable
Disable
0x0000
Delta
480
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
Open
Goto
Value
480
10 s
Second
462
463
464
465
466
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
447
448
449
450
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
446 InAnMod1Ch01Type Disable
Units
InAMod1Ch1Format Eng Units
451
452
453
454
InAMod1C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod1C1OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod1C1TripDly 1.0
s
Second
InAMod1C1TripLvl 0
InAMod1C1WarnLvl 0
InAnMod1Ch02Type Disable
InAMod1Ch2Format Eng Units
InAMod1C2FiltFrq
InAMod1C2OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod1C2TripDly
InAMod1C2TripLvl
17 Hz
1.0
0
InAMod1C2WarnLvl 0
OutAnMod1Type Disable
OutAnMod1Select
OutAnMod1FltActn
Ave %FLA
Zero s
Second
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
OutAnMod1IdlActn
InAnMod2Ch00Type
Zero
Disable
InAMod2Ch0Format Eng Units
InAMod2C0TmpUnit Degrees C
InAMod2C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod2C0OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod2C0TripDly 1.0
InAMod2C0TripLvl 0
InAMod2C0WarnLvl 0 s
Second
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 295
Chapter 7 Commands
Number Parameter Name Default
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
239
240
241
242
243
244
SensingModuleTyp
CommsModuleType
OperStationType
DigitalMod1Type
DigitalMod2Type
DigitalMod3Type
DigitalMod4Type
AnalogMod1Type
AnalogMod2Type
AnalogMod3Type
AnalogMod4Type
MismatchAction
PLInhibitTime
PLTripDelay
GroundFaultType
GFInhibitTime
GFTripDelay
GFTripLevel
Value
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
0
0x0000
1 s
Second s
Second
Internal
369
370
10
0.5
2.50
Units s
Second s
Second
Amps
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
356 UVTripDelay 1.0
Units
357
358
UVTripLevel
UVWarningLevel
100.0
400.0
s
Second
Volt
Volt
359
360
361
362
OVInhibitTime
OVTripDelay
OVTripLevel
OVWarningLevel
10
1.0
500.0
490.0
s
Second s
Second
Volt
Volt
363 PhRotInhibitTime 10
Number
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
Parameter Name
InAnMod2Ch01Type Disable
InAMod2Ch1Format
InAMod2C1TmpUnit
InAMod2C1FiltFrq
InAMod2C1OpCktSt
InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn
InAMod2C1TripDly
InAMod2C1TripLvl
Default
Value
Eng Units
Degrees C
17 Hz
Upscale
3-Wire
1.0
0
Units s
Second
364
365
366
367
368
PhaseRotTripType
VIBInhibitTime
VIBTripDelay
VIBTripLevel
VIBWarningLevel
ABC
10
1.0
15
10 s
Second
484
485
486 s
Second s
Second
%
%
487
488
489
InAMod2C1WarnLvl
InAnMod2Ch02Type
InAMod2Ch2Format
InAMod2C2TmpUnit
InAMod2C2FiltFrq
0
Disable
Eng Units
Degrees C
17 Hz
371
372
373
UFInhibitTime
UFTripDelay
UFTripLevel
UFWarningLevel
OFInhibitTime
10
1.0
57
58
10 s
Second s
Second
Hz
Hz
490
491
492
493
InAMod2C2OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod2C2TripDly
InAMod2C2TripLvl
InAMod2C2WarnLvl
1.0
0
0 s
Second
245
246
247
248
249
250
GFWarningDelay
GFWarningLevel
GFFilter
GFMaxInhibit
StallEnabledTime
StallTripLevel
0
2.00
Disable
Disable
10
600 s
Second
Amps s
Second
%FLA
374
375
376
377
378
379
OFTripDelay
OFTripLevel
OFWarningLevel
PowerScale
UWInhibitTime
UWTripDelay
1.0
63
62 kW
10
1.0
s
Second s
Second
Hz
Hz
494
495 s
Second s
Second
500
496
497
498
499
OutAnMod2Type
OutAnMod2Select
OutAnMod2FltActn
OutAnMod2dlActn
InAnMod3Ch00Type
InAMod3Ch0Format
Disable
Ave %FLA
Zero
Zero
Disable
Eng Units
296 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Commands Chapter 7
Number Parameter Name
251 JamInhibitTime
252
253
JamTripDelay
JamTripLevel
Default
Value
10
Units
5.0
250 s
Second s
Second
%FLA
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
380 UWTripLevel 0.000
Units kW
381
382
UWWarningLevel
OWInhibitTime
0.000
kW
254
255
256
257
JamWarningLevel
ULInhibitTime
ULTripDelay
ULTripLevel
150
10
5.0
50
%FLA s
Second s
Second
%FLA
383
384
385
386
OWTripDelay
OWTripLevel
OWWarningLevel
UVARCInhibitTime
0.000
kW
Number
501
502
10
1.0
0.000
s
Second s
Second kW
503
504
505
506
Parameter Name Default
Value
InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
InAMod3C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod3C0OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn
InAMod3C0TripDly
InAMod3C0TripLvl
InAMod3C0WarnLvl
3-Wire
1.0
0
0
Units s
Second
258
259
ULWarningLevel
CIInhibitTime
70
10
%FLA 387 UVARCTripDelay
UVARCTripLevel
10
1.0
0.000
s
Second s
Second kVAR
507
508
509
InAnMod3Ch01Type
InAMod3Ch1Format
Disable
Eng Units
260
261
CITripDelay
CITripLevel
5.0
35 s
Second s
Second
%
388
389
390
UVARCWarnLevel
OVARCInhibitTime
0.000
kVAR 510 InAMod3C1TmpUnit
InAMod3C1FiltFrq
Degrees C
17 Hz
262
263
264
265
CIWarningLevel
CTPrimary
CTSecondary
UCInhibitTime
20
5
5
10
% 391
392
393
OVARCTripDelay
OVARCTripLevel
OVARCWarnLevel
UVARGInhibitTime
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
s
Second s
Second kVAR kVAR
511
512
513
514
InAMod3C1OpCktSt
InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn
InAMod3C1TripDly
InAMod3C1TripLvl
Upscale
3-Wire
1.0
0 s
Second
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
L1UCTripDelay
L1UCTripLevel
L1UCWarningLevel
L2UCTripDelay
L2UCTripLevel
L2UCWarningLevel
L3UCTripDelay
1.0
35
40
1.0
35
40
1.0
s s
Second s
Second
%
% s
Second
%
394
395
396
397
398
399
%
Second
400
401
UVARGTripDelay
UVARGTripLevel
UVARGWarnLevel
OVARGInhibitTime
OVARGTripDelay
OVARGTripLevel
OVARGWarnLevel
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
kVAR s
Second s
Second kVAR s
Second s
Second kVAR kVAR
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
InAMod3C1WarnLvl
InAnMod3Ch02Type Disable
InAMod3Ch2Format Eng Units
InAMod3C2TmpUnit Degrees C
InAMod3C2FiltFrq
InAMod3C2OpCktSt
0
17 Hz
Upscale
InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 297
Chapter 7 Commands
293
294
295
283
284
285
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
273 L3UCTripLevel 35
274
275
276
277
L3UCWarningLevel
OCInhibitTime
L1OCTripDelay
L1OCTripLevel
40
10
1.0
100
Units
%
% s
Second s
Second
%
405
406
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
402 UVAInhibitTime 10
Units
403
404
UVATripDelay
UVATripLevel
1.0
0.000
s
Second s
Second kVA 525
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
523 InAMod3C2TripDly 1.0
Units s
Second
524 InAMod3C2TripLvl 0
InAMod3C2WarnLvl 0
UVAWarningLevel
OVAInhibitTime
0.000
kVA 526 OutAnMod3Type
OutAnMod3Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
278
279
280
281
L1OCWarningLevel
L2OCTripDelay
L2OCTripLevel
L2OCWarningLevel
90
1.0
100
90
% s
Second
%
%
407
408
409
410
OVATripDelay
OVATripLevel
OVAWarningLevel
UPFLagInhibTime
10
1.0
0.000
s
Second s
Second kVA
527
528
529
OutAnMod3FltActn
OutAnMod3dlActn
Zero
Zero
InAnMod4Ch00Type Disable
InAMod4Ch0Format Eng Units
282
286
287
288
L3OCTripDelay
L3OCTripLevel
L3OCWarningLevel
LineLossInhTime
L1LossTripDelay
L2LossTripDelay
L3LossTripDelay
1.0
100
90
10
1.0
1.0
1.0
s
Second
%
% s
Second s
Second s
Second s
Second
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
UPFLagTripDelay
UPFLagTripLevel
UPFLagWarnLevel
OPFLagInhibTime
OPFLagTripDelay
OPFLagTripLevel
OPFLagWarnLevel
-90
-95
10
0.000
10
1.0
1.0
-95
% s
Second s
Second
% kVA s
Second s
Second
%
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
-90 % 538
InAMod3C0TmpUnit
InAMod4C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod4C0OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod4C0TripDly
InAMod4C0TripLvl
InAMod4C0WarnLvl
Degrees C
1.0
0
0 s
Second
291
292
296
297
Datalink0
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
UPFLeadInhibTime 10
UPFLeadTripDelay
UPFLeadTripLevel
UPFLeadWarnLevel
OPFLeadInhibTime
OPFLeadTripDelay
OPFLeadTripLevel
1.0
90
95
10
1.0
95
% s
Second s
Second
% s
Second s
Second
%
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
InAnMod4Ch01Type Disable
InAMod4Ch1Format
InAMod4C1TmpUnit
InAMod4C1FiltFrq
Eng Units
InAMod4C1OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn
InAMod4C1TripDly
Degrees C
17 Hz
3-Wire
1.0
s
Second
298 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Commands Chapter 7
Number Parameter Name
298 Datalink7
Default
Value
0
Units Number Parameter Name Default
Value
425 OPFLeadWarnLevel 90
Units
%
426
427
DemandPeriod
NumberOfPeriods
15
1
Min
555
556
557
558
559
560
549
550
551
552
553
554
Number Parameter Name Default
Value
546 InAMod4C1TripLvl 0
547
548
InAMod4C1WarnLvl
InAnMod4Ch02Type
0
Disable
Units
InAMod4Ch2Format Eng Units
InAMod4C2TmpUnit Degrees C
InAMod4C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
InAMod4C2OpCktSt Upscale
InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
InAMod4C2TripDly 1.0
s
Second
InAMod4C2TripLvl 0
InAMod4C2WarnLvl 0
OutAnMod4Type
OutAnMod4Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
OutAnMod4FltActn
OutAnMod4dlActn
Zero
Zero
Clear Command
Clear Command (Parameter 165) allows you to clear historical logs, operating statistics, and energy data within the nonvolatile memory of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
Table 354 - Clear Command (Parameter 165)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Ready
0 = Ready
1 = Clear Operating Statistics
2 = Clear History Logs
3 = Clear %TCU
4 = Clear kWh
5 = Clear kVARh
1
6 = Clear kVAh
7 = Clear Max kW Demand
8 = Clear Max kVAR Demand
9 = Clear Max kVA Demand
10 = Clear All
USINT
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 299
Chapter 7 Commands
300
Clear Operating Statistics
When the Clear Operating Statistics command is issued, the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• Operating Time (Parameter 28)
• Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Clear History Logs
When the Clear History Logs command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• Trip History 0 (Parameter 127)
• Trip History 1 (Parameter 128)
• Trip History 2 (Parameter 129)
• Trip History 3 (Parameter 130)
• Trip History 4 (Parameter 131)
• Warning History 0 (Parameter 132)
• Warning History 1 (Parameter 133)
• Warning History 2 (Parameter 134)
• Warning History 3 (Parameter 135)
• Warning History 4 (Parameter 136)
Clear %TCU
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) to a value of zero (0).
Clear kWh
When the Clear kWh command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• kWh x 10
9
(Parameter 80)
• kWh x 10
6
(Parameter 81)
• kWh x 10
3
(Parameter 82)
• kWh x 10
0
(Parameter 83)
• kWh x 10
-3
(Parameter 84)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Commands Chapter 7
Clear kVARh
When the Clear kVARh command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• kVARh Consumed x 10
9
(Parameter 85)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
6
(Parameter 86)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
3
(Parameter 87)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
0
(Parameter 88)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
(Parameter 89)
• kVARh Generated x 10
9
(Parameter 90)
• kVARh Generated x 10
6
(Parameter 91)
• kVARh Generated x 10
3
(Parameter 92)
• kVARh Generated x 10
0
(Parameter 93)
• kVARh Generated x 10
-3
(Parameter 94)
• kVARh Net x 10
9
(Parameter 95)
• kVARh Net x 10
6
(Parameter 96)
• kVARh Net x 10
3
(Parameter 97)
• kVARh Net x 10
0
(Parameter 98)
• kVARh Net x 10
-3
(Parameter 99)
Clear kVAh
When the Clear kVAh command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• kVAh x 10
9
(Parameter 100)
• kVAh x 10
6
(Parameter 101)
• kVAh x 10
3
(Parameter 102)
• kVAh x 10
0
(Parameter 103)
• kVAh x 10
-3
(Parameter 104)
Clear Max kW Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets Max kW Demand (Parameter 106) to a value of zero (0).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 301
Chapter 7 Commands
302
Clear Max kVAR Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets Max kVAR Demand (Parameter 108) to a value of zero (0).
Clear Max kVA Demand
When the Clear %TCU command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets Max kVA Demand (Parameter 110) to a value of zero (0).
Clear All
When the Clear All command is issued, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay sets the following parameters to a value of zero (0):
• % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1)
• Operating Time (Parameter 28)
• Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
• kWh x 10
9
(Parameter 80)
• kWh x 10
6
(Parameter 81)
• kWh x 10
3
(Parameter 82)
• kWh x 10
0
(Parameter 83)
• kWh x 10
-3
(Parameter 84)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
9
(Parameter 85)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
6
(Parameter 86)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
3
(Parameter 87)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
0
(Parameter 88)
• kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
(Parameter 89)
• kVARh Generated x 10
9
(Parameter 90)
• kVARh Generated x 10
6
(Parameter 91)
• kVARh Generated x 10
3
(Parameter 92)
• kVARh Generated x 10
0
(Parameter 93)
• kVARh Generated x 10
-3
(Parameter 94)
• kVARh Net x 10
9
(Parameter 95)
• kVARh Net x 10
6
(Parameter 96)
• kVARh Net x 10
3
(Parameter 97)
• kVARh Net x 10
0
(Parameter 98)
• kVARh Net x 10
-3
(Parameter 99)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
• kVAh x 10
9
(Parameter 100)
• kVAh x 10
6
(Parameter 101)
• kVAh x 10
3
(Parameter 102)
• kVAh x 10
0
(Parameter 103)
• kVAh x 10
-3
(Parameter 104)
• Max kW Demand (Parameter 106)
• Max kVAR Demand (Parameter 108)
• Max kVA Demand (Parameter 110)
• Trip History 0 (Parameter 127)
• Trip History 1 (Parameter 128)
• Trip History 2 (Parameter 129)
• Trip History 3 (Parameter 130)
• Trip History 4 (Parameter 131)
• Warning History 0 (Parameter 132)
• Warning History 1 (Parameter 133)
• Warning History 2 (Parameter 134)
• Warning History 3 (Parameter 135)
• Warning History 4 (Parameter 136)
Commands Chapter 7
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 303
Chapter 7 Commands
Notes:
304 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Introduction
Device Monitor
Chapter
8
Metering and Diagnostics
This chapter provides detailed information aboutthe metering and diagnostic information that the E300 Electronic Overload Relay generates. The metering and diagnostic functions are organized into seven sections:
• Device Monitor
• Current Monitor
• Voltage Monitor
• Power Monitor
• Energy Monitor
• Trip/Warning History
• Trip Snapshot
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay's device monitor diagnostics provides information on the status of the device, which includes:
• Thermal overload protection
• Trip and warning protection functions
• Digital inputs and relay outputs
• Operator station
• Hardware options
• Time and date
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) reports the calculated percent thermal capacity utilization of the motor being monitored. When the percent thermal capacity utilization equals 100%, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay issues an overload trip.
Table 355 - Percent Thermal Capacity Utilization (Parameter 1)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
%
0
0
100
USINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 305
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Time to Trip
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay, Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
Table 356 - Overload Time to Trip (Parameter 2)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
9999
0
9999
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Time To Reset
After an overload trip, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through Overload Time to Reset
(Parameter 3). When the % Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the
Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
Table 357 - Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
0
0
9999
UINT
306 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Current Trip Status
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) reports the status of the current-based protective trip functions.
Table 358 - Current Trip Status (Parameter 4)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X Phase Loss Trip
X Ground Fault Current Trip
X Stall Trip
X Jam Trip
X Underload Trip
X Current Imbalance Trip
X L1 Under Current Trip
X L2 Under Current Trip
X L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X L2 Over Current Trip
X L3 Over Current Trip
X L1 Line Loss Trip
X L2 Line Loss Trip
X L3 Line Loss Trip
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 307
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Voltage Trip Status
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions.
Table 359 - Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Under Voltage Trip
Over Voltage Trip
X
X
X
X
Voltage Imbalance Trip
Phase Rotation Mismatch Trip
Under Frequency Trip
Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
308 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Power Trip Status
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions.
Table 360 - Power Trip Status (Parameter 6)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X Under kW Trip
Over kW Trip
Function
X
X
X
X
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
Over kVAR Consumed Trip
Under kVAR Generated Trip
Over kVAR Generated Trip
X
X
X
X
X
X
Under kVA Trip
Over kVA Trip
Under PF Lagging Trip
Over PF Lagging Trip
Under PF Leading Trip
Over PF Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Trip Status
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) reports the status of the control-based protective trip functions.
Table 361 - Control Trip Status (Parameter 7)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X Test Trip
PTC Trip
X
X
X
X
Function
DeviceLogix Trip
Operator Station Trip
Remote Trip
Blocked Start Trip
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Hardware Fault Trip
Configuration Trip
Option Match Trip
Feedback Timeout Trip
Expansion Bus Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Nonvolatile Memory Trip
Test Mode Trip Enable
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 309
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Current Warning Status
Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) reports the status of the current-based protective warning functions.
Table 362 - Current Warning Status (Parameter 10)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
Reserved
X
X
X
Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
Jam Warning
Underload Warning
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Current Imbalance Warning
L1 Under Current Warning
L2 Under Current Warning
L3 Under Current Warning
L1 Over Current Warning
L2 Over Current Warning
L3 Over Current Warning
L1 Line Loss Warning
L2 Line Loss Warning
L3 Line Loss Warning
Voltage Warning Status
Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 363 - Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
X Under Voltage Warning
Over Voltage Warning
X
X
X
X
Voltage Imbalance Warning
Phase Rotation Mismatch Warning
Under Frequency Warning
Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
310 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Power Warning Status
Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 364 - Power Warning Status (Parameter 12)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X
X Over kW Warning
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X
X
X
X
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
Under kVAR Generated Warning
Over kVAR Generated Warning
Under kVA Warning
X
X
X
X
X
Over kVA Warning
Under PF Lagging Warning
Over PF Lagging Warning
Under PF Leading Warning
Over PF Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Warning Status
Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions.
Table 365 - Control Warning Status (Parameter 13)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Function
Reserved
PTC Warning
DeviceLogix Warning
Operator Station Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Option Match Warning
Feedback Timeout Warning
Expansion Bus Warning
Number Of Starts Warning
Operating Hours Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 311
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Input Status 0
Input Status 0 (Parameter 16) reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300
Electronic Overload Relay Control Module.
Table 366 - Input Status 0 (Parameter 16)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X Input Pt00
Input Pt01
X
X
X
X
Input Pt02
Input Pt03
Input Pt04
Input Pt05
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Input Status 1
Function
Input Status 1 (Parameter 17) reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300
Electronic Overload Relay Digital Expansion Modules.
Table 367 - Input Status 1 (Parameter 17)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Digital Module 1 Input Pt00
X
X Digital Module 1 Input Pt01
Digital Module 1 Input Pt02
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 1 Input Pt03
Digital Module 2 Input Pt00
Digital Module 2 Input Pt01
Digital Module 2 Input Pt02
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 2 Input Pt03
Digital Module 3 Input Pt00
Digital Module 3 Input Pt01
Digital Module 3 Input Pt02
Digital Module 3 Input Pt03
Digital Module 4 Input Pt00
Digital Module 4 Input Pt01
Digital Module 4 Input Pt02
Digital Module 4 Input Pt03
312 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Output Status
Output Status (Parameter 18) reports the state of the relay outputs on the E300
Electronic Overload Relay Control Module and Digital Expansion Modules.
Table 368 - Output Status (Parameter 18)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Output Pt00
X
X Output Pt01
Output Pt02
Function
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 1 Output Pt00
Digital Module 1 Output Pt01
Digital Module 2 Output Pt00
Digital Module 2 Output Pt01
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 3 Output Pt00
Digital Module 3 Output Pt01
Digital Module 4 Output Pt00
Digital Module 4 Output Pt01
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 313
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Operator Station Status
Operator Station Status (Parameter 19) reports the state of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay Operator Station input buttons and output LEDs.
Table 369 - Operator Station Status (Parameter 19)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Operation Station I
X
X Operation Station II
Operation Station Local Remote
X
X
Operation Station O
Operation Station Reset
Reserved
Reserved
X
X
X
X
X
Reserved
Operation Station I LED
Operation Station II LED
Operation Station Local LED
Operation Station Remote LED
Operation Station O LED
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
314 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Device Status 0
Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) reports the general status of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay and the sensing capabilities that are present.
Table 370 - Device Status 0 (Parameter 20)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Trip Present
X
X
Function
Warning Present
Invalid Configuration
X
X
X
X
Current Present
Ground Fault Current Present
Voltage Present
Emergency Start Enabled
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DeviceLogix Enabled
Feedback Timeout Enabled
Operator Station Present
Voltage Sensing Present
Internal Ground Fault Sensing Present
External Ground Fault Sensing Present
PTC Sensing Present
Ready
Reserved
Device Status 0 bit 14, "Ready", is cleared under the following circumstances:
• Device Status 0 bit 0, "Trip Present", is set
• The E300 Electronic Overload Relay has not completed its power-up initialization
• The processing of data in a configuration assembly is in progress
• A CopyCat function is in progress
• A Factory Defaults command has been invoked and is in progress.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 315
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Device Status 1
Device Status 1 (Parameter 21) reports the specific features of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay Control and Sensing Modules, it reports which
Expansion Digital Modules Analog Modules are present on the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay Expansion Bus.
Table 371 - Device Status 1 (Parameter 21)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X 24V DC Control Module Present
X
X 120V AC Control Module Present
240V AC Control Module Present
X
X
X
X
0.5…30 A Sensing Module Present
6…60 A Sensing Module Present
10…100 A Sensing Module Present
20…2000 A Sensing Module Present
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Digital Module 1 Present
Digital Module 2 Present
Digital Module 3 Present
Digital Module 4 Present
Analog Module 1 Present
Analog Module 2 Present
Analog Module 3 Present
Analog Module 4 Present
Reserved
Firmware Revision Number
Firmware Revision Number (Parameter 22) reports the firmware revision number of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 372 - Firmware Revision Number (Parameter 22)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
65.535
UINT
2
1000
Control Module ID
Control Module ID (Parameter 23) identifies which specific Control Module is present in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
316 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 373 - Control Module ID (Parameter 23)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
1
1
0 = Unknown
1 = 193-EIO-63-24D
2 = 193-EIO-43-120
3 = 193-EIO-43-240
4 = 193-EIOGP-42-24D
5 = 193-EIOGP-22-120
6 = 193-EIOGP-22-240
USINT
Sensing Module ID
Sensing Module ID (Parameter 24) identifies which specific Sensing Module is present in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 374 - Sensing Module ID (Parameter 24)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = Unknown
1 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-30A-__
2 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-60A-__
3 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-100A-__
4 = 193/592-EIO-VIG-200A-__
5 = 193/592-EIO-IG-30A-__
6 = 193/592-EIO-IG-60A-__
7 = 193/592-EIO-IG-100A-__
8 = 193/592-EIO-IG-200A-__
9 = 193/592-EIO-I-30A-__
10 = 193/592-EIO-I-60A-__
11 = 193/592-EIO-I-100A-__
12 = 193/592-EIO-I-200A-__
USINT
1
1
Operator Station ID
Operator Station ID (Parameter 25) identifies which specific Operator Station is present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 317
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Table 375 - Operator Station ID (Parameter 25)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = Unknown
1 = None
2 = 193-EOS-SCS
3 = 193-EOS-SDS
USINT
1
1
Expansion Digital Module ID
Expansion Digital Module ID (Parameter 26) identifies which specific
Expansion Digital Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 376 - Expansion Digital Module ID (Parameter 26)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
0 0 0 None
0 1 0 193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
Digital Module 1
0 1 1 193-EXP-DIO-42-120
1 0 0 193-EXP-DIO-42-240
0 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital Module 2
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0 0 0
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
None
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
Digital Module 3
Digital Module 4
Operating Time
Operating Time (Parameter 28) represents the number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
318 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 377 - Operating Time (Parameter 28)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
65535
UINT
2
1
Hours
Starts Counter
Starts Counter (Parameter 29) represents the number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter
165) function Clear Operating Statistics.
Table 378 - Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
65535
UINT
Starts Available
Starts Available (Parameter 30) reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Table 379 - Starts Available (Parameter 30)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
1
0
0
120
USINT
Time to Start
Time to Start (Parameter 31) reports the amount of time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 319
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
320
Table 380 - Time to Start (Parameter 31)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
3600
UINT
2
1
Seconds
Year
Year (Parameter 32) reports the year in the virtual real-time clock of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay.
Table 381 - Year (Parameter 32)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
12
UINT
2
1
Month
Month (Parameter 33) reports the month in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Table 382 - Month (Parameter 33)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
12
UINT
2
1
Day
Day (Parameter 34) reports the day in the virtual real-time clock of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 383 - Day (Parameter 34)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
31
UINT
2
1
Hour
Hour (Parameter 35) reports the hour in the virtual real-time clock of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay.
Table 384 - Hour (Parameter 35)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
24
UINT
2
1
Minute
Minute (Parameter 36) reports the minute in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Table 385 - Minute (Parameter 36)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
60
UINT
2
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 321
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
322
Second
Second (Parameter 37) reports the second in the virtual real-time clock of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Table 386 - Second (Parameter 37)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
60
UINT
2
1
Invalid Configuration Parameter
Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) reports the parameter number that is causing a configuration trip in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. See
for more information about a configuration fault.
Table 387 - Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
9999
UINT
Invalid Configuration Cause
Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) reports the reason for the configuration trip in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. See
more information about a configuration fault.
Table 388 - Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0 = No Error
1 = Value Over Maximum
2 = Value Under Minimum
3 = Illegal Value
4 = L3 Current Detected
5 = CopyCat Error
USINT
1
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Current Monitor
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Mismatch Status
Mismatch Status (Parameter 40) reports the module that is causing a mismatch trip or warning in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. See
for more information on a mismatch fault.
Table 389 - Mismatch Status (Parameter 40)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Match
1 Mismatch
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Match
Mismatch
Function
Control Module
Sensing Module
Communication
Module
Operator Station
Digital Module 1
Digital Module 2
Digital Module 3
Digital Module 4
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 4
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay current monitor diagnostics provides information on the current consumed by the load that the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay is monitoring, and it provides diagnostics for a three-phase current system including imbalance and ground fault current.
L1 Current
L1 Current (Parameter 43) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L1 and T1 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing
Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 323
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
324
Table 390 - L1 Current (Parameter 43)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
L2 Current
L2 Current (Parameter 44) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L2 and T2 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing
Module.
Table 391 - L2 Current (Parameter 44)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
L3 Current
L3 Current (Parameter 45) reports the current in Amperes flowing through the
L3 and T3 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing
Module.
Table 392 - L3 Current (Parameter 45)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
Average Current
Average Current (Parameter 46) reports the average current of the monitored current. When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to three phase, average current is calculated as follows:
Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current + L3 Current) / 3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to single phase, average current is calculated as follows:
Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current) / 2
Table 393 - Average Current (Parameter 46)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.00
0.00
20000000.00
DINT
4
100
Amps
L1 Percent FLA
L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47) reports the L1 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L1 Percent FLA = L1 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 394 - L1 Percent FLA (Parameter 47)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
L2 Percent FLA
L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48) reports the L2 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L2 Percent FLA = L2 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 395 - L2 Percent FLA (Parameter 48)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 325
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
326
L3 Percent FLA
L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49) reports the L3 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
L3 Percent FLA = L3 Current / Full Load Amps
Table 396 - L3 Percent FLA (Parameter 49)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
2
10
%
Average Percent FLA
Average Percent FLA (Parameter 50) reports the average current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2
(Parameter 177).
Average Percent FLA = Average Current / Full Load Amps
Table 397 - Average Percent FLA (Parameter 50)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
1000.00
UINT
2
10
%
Ground Fault Current
Ground Fault Current (Parameter 51) reports the ground fault current measured by the internal core balanced current transformer of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay Sensing Module or external core balanced current transformer.
Table 398 - Ground Fault Current (Parameter 51)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
99.99
UINT
2
100
Amps
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Voltage Monitor
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Current Imbalance
Current Imbalance (Parameter 52) reports the percentage of uneven current consumption in the monitored power system. Current Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
Current Imbalance = 100% * (I d
/I a
)
where
I d
= Maximum Line Current Deviation from the Average Current
I a
= Average Current
Table 399 - Current Imbalance (Parameter 52)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
%
0
0
200
UINT
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s voltage monitor diagnostics provides information on the voltage being supplied to the load. The voltage diagnostics include three-phase voltage, phase imbalance, phase rotation, and frequency.
L1-L2 Voltage
L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 53) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 400 - L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 53)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 327
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
328
L2-L3 Voltage
L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 54) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 401 - L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 54)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Table 402 - L3-L1 Voltage
L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 55) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 403 - L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 55)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Average L-L Voltage
Average L-L Voltage (Parameter 56) reports the average voltage of the monitored
L-L voltages. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase ,
Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage + L3-L1 Voltage) / 3
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Average L-L
Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage) / 2
Table 404 - Average L-L Voltage (Parameter 56)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
L1-N Voltage
L1-N Voltage (Parameter 57) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 power terminal of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 405 - L1-N Voltage (Parameter 57)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L2-N Voltage
L2-N Voltage (Parameter 58) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 power terminal of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 406 - L2-N Voltage (Parameter 58)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
L3-N Voltage
L3-N Voltage (Parameter 59) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 power terminal of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing Module.
Table 407 - L3-N Voltage (Parameter 59)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 329
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Average L-N Voltage
Average L-N Voltage (Parameter 60) reports the average voltage of the monitored
L-N voltages. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase ,
Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage + L3-N Voltage) / 3
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Average L-N
Voltage is calculated as follows:
Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage) / 2
Table 408 - Average L-N Voltage (Parameter 60)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Voltage Imbalance
Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61) reports the percentage of uneven voltage being supplied by the monitored power system. Voltage Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
Voltage Imbalance = 100% * (Vd/Va) where
Vd = Maximum L-L Voltage Deviation from the Average L-L Voltage
Va = Average L-L Voltage
Table 409 - Voltage Imbalance (Parameter 61)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
%
0
0
200
UINT
330 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Power Monitor
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Frequency
Frequency (Parameter 62) reports the voltage frequency in Hertz of the monitored power system from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing
Module.
Table 410 - Frequency (Parameter 62)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
Hz
0.0
0.0
74.0
UINT
Phase Rotation
Phase Rotation (Parameter 63) reports the voltage phase rotation as ABC or
ACB of the monitored power system from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Sensing Module.
Table 411 - Phase Rotation Trip Type (Parameter 63)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = No Rotation
0 = No Rotation
1 = ABC
1
1
2 = ACB
USINT
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s power monitor diagnostics provides information on the power being supplied to the load. The power diagnostics include real power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor.
Power Scale
For large medium voltage-based power systems, it may be more convenient for you to view the real-time power information (Parameters 64-75) in terms of
Megawatts instead of Kilowatts. Power Scale (Parameter 377) allows the E300
Electronic Overload Relay to display the values of Parameters 64…75as Kilowatts or Megawatts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 331
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
332
Table 412 - Power Scale (Parameter 377)
Default Value
Range
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0 = Kilowatts
0 = Kilowatts
1 = Megawatts
1
USINT
1
L1 Real Power
L1 Real Power (Parameter 64) reports the real power for line 1 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Real Power is set to 0.
Table 413 - L1 Real Power (Parameter 64)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
L2 Real Power
L2 Real Power (Parameter 65) reports the real power for line 2 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Real Power is set to 0.
Table 414 - L2 Real Power (Parameter 65)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
L3 Real Power
L3 Real Power (Parameter 66) reports the real power for line 3 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When
Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Real Power is
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8 set to 0. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , L3
Real Power is set to 0.
Table 415 - L3 Real Power (Parameter 66)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
Total Real Power
Total Real Power (Parameter 67) reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for
Power Scale (Parameter 377). When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase , Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power + L3 Real Power)
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Total Real
Power is calculated as follows:
Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power)
Table 416 - Total Real Power (Parameter 67)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW or MW
L1 Reactive Power
L1 Reactive Power (Parameter 68) reports the reactive power for line 1 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter
377). When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1
Reactive Power is set to 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 333
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
334
Table 417 - L1 Reactive Power (Parameter 68)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR or MVAR
L2 Reactive Power
L2 Reactive Power (Parameter 69) reports the reactive power for line 2 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter
377). When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2
Reactive Power is set to 0.
Table 418 - L2 Reactive Power (Parameter 69)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR or MVAR
L3 Reactive Power
L3 Reactive Power (Parameter 70) reports the reactive power for line 3 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter
377). When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3
Reactive Power is set to 0. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase , L3 Reactive Power is set to 0.
Table 419 - L3 Reactive Power (Parameter 70)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR or MVAR
Total Reactive Power
Total Reactive Power (Parameter 71) reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR or MVAR depending on the
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8 configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When Single or Three
Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase , Total Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power + L3 Reactive
Power)
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Total
Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power)
Table 420 - Total Reactive Power (Parameter 71)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000c
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR or MVAR
L1 Apparent Power
L1 Apparent Power (Parameter 72) reports the apparent power for line 1 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377).
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1
Apparent Power is set to 0.
Table 421 - L1 Apparent Power (Parameter 72)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA or MVA
L2 Apparent Power
L2 Apparent Power (Parameter 73) reports the apparent power for line 2 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377).
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2
Apparent Power is set to 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 335
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Table 422 - L2 Apparent Power (Parameter 73)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA or MVA
L3 Apparent Power
L3 Apparent Power (Parameter 74) reports the apparent power for line 3 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377).
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3
Apparent Power is set to 0. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase , L3 Apparent Power is set to 0.
Table 423 - L3 Apparent Power (Parameter 74)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA or MVA
Total Apparent Power
Total Apparent Power (Parameter 75) reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377). When Single or Three Phase (Parameter
176) is set to Three Phase , Total Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power + L3 Apparent
Power)
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Total
Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power)
336 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 424 - Total Apparent Power (Parameter 75)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA or MVA
L1 Power Factor
L1 Power Factor (Parameter 76) reports the power factor for line 1 in percentage.
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L1 Power
Factor is set to 0.
Table 425 - L1 Power Factor (Parameter 76)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
10
%
0.0
-100.0
100.0
INT
L2 Power Factor Power
L2 Power Factor (Parameter 77) reports the power factor for line 2 in percentage.
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L2 Power
Factor is set to 0.
Table 426 - L2 Power Factor (Parameter 77)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
10
%
0.0
-100.0
100.0
L3 Power Factor
L3 Power Factor (Parameter 78) reports the power factor for line 3 in percentage.
When Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any Delta base setting, L3 Power
Factor is set to 0. When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single
Phase , L3 power factor is set to 0.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 337
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Energy Monitor
338
Table 427 - L3 Power Factor (Parameter 78)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
10
%
0.0
-100.0
100.0
Total Power Factor
Total Power Factor (Parameter 79) reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage. When Single or Three Phase
(Parameter 176) is set to Three Phase , Total Power Factor is calculated as follows:
Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor + L3 Power Factor) / 3
When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to Single Phase , Total Power
Factor is calculated as follows:
Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor) / 2
Table 428 - Total Power Factor (Parameter 79)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
10
%
0.0
-100.0
100.0
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s energy monitor diagnostics provides information on the electrical energy the load is consuming. The energy diagnostics include kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA
Demand.
kWh 10
9 kWh 10
9
(Parameter 80) reports a component of total real energy (kWh).
Multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kWh parameters.
Represents XXX , 000,000,000.000 kWh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 429 - kWh x 10E9 (Parameter 80)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
kWh 10
6 kWh 10
6
(Parameter 81) reports a component of total real energy (kWh).
Multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kWh parameters.
Represents 000, XXX ,000,000.000
kWh
Table 430 - kWh x 10E6 (Parameter 81)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kWh 10
3 kWh 10
3
(Parameter 82) reports a component of total real energy (kWh).
Multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kWh parameters.
Represents 000,000, XXX ,000.000 kWh
Table 431 - kWh x 10E3 (Parameter 82)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 339
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
kWh 10
0 kWh 10
0
(Parameter 83) reports a component of total real energy (kWh).
Multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kWh parameters.
Represents 000,000,000, XXX .000 kWh
Table 432 - kWh x 10
0
(Parameter 83)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
-999
999
INT
2
kWh 10
-3 kWh 10
-3
(Parameter 84) reports a component of total real energy (kWh).
Multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kWh parameters.
Represents 000,000,000,000.
XXX kWh
Table 433 - kWh x 10
-3
(Parameter 84)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kVARh Consumed 10
9 kVARh Consumed 10
9
(Parameter 85) reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters.
Represents XXX , 000,000,000.000 kVARh
340 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 434 - kVARh Consumed x 10
9
(Parameter 85)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
kVARh Consumed 10
6 kVARh Consumed 10
6
(Parameter 86) reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters.
Represents 000, XXX ,000,000.000 kVARh
Table 435 - kVARh Consumed x 10
6
(Parameter 86)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-999
999
kVARh Consumed 10
3 kVARh Consumed 10
3
(Parameter 87) reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters.
Represents 000,000, XXX ,000.000 kVARh
Table 436 - kVARh Consumed x 10
3
(Parameter 87)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 341
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
342
kVARh Consumed 10
0 kVARh Consumed 10
0
(Parameter 88) reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters.
Represents 000,000,000, XXX .000 kVARh
Table 437 - kVARh Consumed x 10
0
(Parameter 88)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
-999
999
INT
2
kVARh Consumed 10
-3 kVARh Consumed 10
-3
(Parameter 89) reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters.
Represents 000,000,000,000.
XXX kVARh
Table 438 - kVARh Consumed x 10
-3
(Parameter 89)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kVARh Generated 10
9 kVARh Generated 10
9
(Parameter 90) reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters.
Represents XXX , 000,000,000.000 kVARh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 439 - kVARh Generated x 10
9
(Parameter 90)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
kVARh Generated 10
6 kVARh Consumed 10
6
(Parameter 91) reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters.
Represents 000, XXX ,000,000.000 kVARh
Table 440 - kVARh Generated x 10
6
(Parameter 91)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-999
999
kVARh Generated 10
3 kVARh Generated 10
3
(Parameter 92) reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters.
Represents 000,000, XXX ,000.000 kVARh
Table 441 - kVARh Generated x 10
3
(Parameter 92)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 343
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
344
kVARh Generated 10
0 kVARh Generated 10
0
(Parameter 93) reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters.
Represents 000,000,000, XXX .000 kVARh
Table 442 - kVARh Generated x 10
0
(Parameter 93)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
-999
999
INT
2
kVARh Generated 10
-3 kVARh Generated 10
-3
(Parameter 94) reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters.
Represents 000,000,000,000.
XXX kVARh
Table 443 - kVARh Generated x 10
-3
(Parameter 94)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kVARh Net 10
9 kVARh Net 10
9
(Parameter 95) reports a component of total reactive energy net
(kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters.
Represents XXX , 000,000,000.000 kVARh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 444 - kVARh Net x 10
9
(Parameter 95)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
kVARh Net 10
6 kVARh Net 10
6
(Parameter 96) reports a component of total reactive energy net
(kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters.
Represents 000, XXX ,000,000.000 kVARh
Table 445 - kVARh Net x 10
6
(Parameter 96)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
1
0
-999
999
kVARh Net 10
3 kVARh Net 10
3
(Parameter 97) reports a component of total reactive energy net
(kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters.
Represents 000,000, XXX ,000.000 kVARh
Table 446 - kVARh Net x 10
3
(Parameter 97)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 345
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
346
kVARh Net 10
0 kVARh Net 10
0
(Parameter 98) reports a component of total reactive energy net
(kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters.
Represents 000,000,000, XXX .000 kVARh
Table 447 - kVARh Net x 10
0
(Parameter 98)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
-999
999
INT
2
kVARh Net 10
-3 kVARh Net 10
-3
(Parameter 99) reports a component of total reactive energy net
(kVARh). Multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVARh Net parameters.
Represents 000,000,000,000.
XXX kVARh
Table 448 - kVARh Net x 10
-3
(Parameter 99)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kVAh 10
9 kVAh 10
9
(Parameter 100) reports a component of total apparent energy
(kVAh). Multiply this value by 10
9
and add to the other kVAh parameters.
Represents XXX , 000,000,000.000 kVAh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 449 - kVAh x 10
9
(Parameter 100)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-999
999
kVAh 10
6 kVAh 10
6
(Parameter 101) reports a component of total apparent energy
(kVAh). Multiply this value by 10
6
and add to the other kVAh parameters.
Represents 000, XXX ,000,000.000 kVAh
Table 450 - kVAh x 10
6
(Parameter 101)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
-999
2
1
999
INT
kVAh 10
3 kVAh 10
3
(Parameter 102) reports a component of total apparent energy
(kVAh). Multiply this value by 10
3
and add to the other kVAh parameters.
Represents 000,000, XXX ,000.000 kVAh
Table 451 - kVAh x 10
3
(Parameter 102)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 347
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
348
kVAh 10
0 kVAh 10
0
(Parameter 103) reports a component of total apparent energy
(kVAh). Multiply this value by 10
0
and add to the other kVAh parameters.
Represents 000,000,000, XXX .000 kVAh
Table 452 - kVAh x 10
0
(Parameter 103)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
0
-999
999
INT
2
kVAh 10
-3 kVAh 10
-3
(Parameter 104) reports a component of total apparent energy
(kVAh). Multiply this value by 10
-3
and add to the other kVAh parameters.
Represents 000,000,000,000.
XXX kVAh
Table 453 - kVAh x 10
-3
(Parameter 104)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-999
999
INT
kW Demand
kW Demand (Parameter 105) reports the average real energy usage in kW over a defined period.
Table 454 - kW Demand (Parameter 105)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Max kW Demand
Max kW Demand (Parameter 106) reports the maximum kW Demand since the last Max kW Demand Reset command.
Table 455 - Max kW Demand (Parameter 106)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
kVAR Demand
kVAR Demand (Parameter 107) reports the average reactive energy usage in kVAR over a defined period.
Table 456 - kVAR Demand (Parameter 107)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
Max kVAR Demand
Max kVAR Demand (Parameter 108) reports the maximum kVAR Demand since the last Max kVAR Demand Reset command.
Table 457 - Max kVAR Demand (Parameter 108)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR
kVA Demand
kVA Demand (Parameter 109) reports the average reactive energy usage in kVA over a defined period.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 349
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Analog Monitor
350
Table 458 - kVA Demand (Parameter 109)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
Max kVA Demand
Max kVA Demand (Parameter 110) reports the maximum kVA Demand since the last Max kVA Demand Reset command.
Table 459 - Max kVA Demand (Parameter 110)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to monitor the following analog applications:
• Motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
• Liquid, air, or steam flow
• Temperature
• Weight
• Vessel level
• Potentiometer
• PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Module 1
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 111) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 460 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 111)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 112) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01.
Table 461 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 112)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 113) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02.
Table 462 - Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 113)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 1 Status
Analog Module 1 Status (Parameter 123) reports the status of Analog Module 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 351
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Table 463 - Analog Module 1 Status (Parameter 123)
Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Input Channel 00 Open Circuit
X
X
Input Channel 00 Over Range
Input Channel 00 Under Range
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit
Input Channel 01 Over Range
Input Channel 01 Under Range
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 02 Over Range
Input Channel 02 Under Range
Output Channel 00 Open Circuit
Output Channel 00 Hold Last State
Mode Active
Output Channel 00 Over Range
Output Channel 00 Under Range
Analog Module Configured
Analog Module Warning (Module
Number Dial Changed)
Analog Module Faulted
Analog Module 2
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 114) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00.
Table 464 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 114)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 115) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01.
352 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 465 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 115)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02)
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 113) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02.
Table 466 - Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 116)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 2 Status
Analog Module 2 Status (Parameter 124) reports the status of Analog Module 2.
Table 467 - Analog Module 2 Status (Parameter 124)
X
X
Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Input Channel 00 Open Circuit
X
X
Input Channel 00 Over Range
Input Channel 00 Under Range
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit
Input Channel 01 Over Range
Input Channel 01 Under Range
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 02 Over Range
Input Channel 02 Under Range
Output Channel 00 Open Circuit
Output Channel 00 Hold Last State Mode Active
Output Channel 00 Over Range
Output Channel 00 Under Range
Analog Module Configured
Analog Module Warning (Module Number Dial Changed)
Analog Module Faulted
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 353
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
354
Analog Module 3
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 117) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00.
Table 468 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 117)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 118) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01.
Table 469 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 118)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 119) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02.
Table 470 - Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 119)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 3 Status
Analog Module 3 Status (Parameter 125) reports the status of Analog Module 3.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 471 - Analog Module 3 Status (Parameter 125)
X
X
Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Input Channel 00 Open Circuit
X
X
Input Channel 00 Over Range
Input Channel 00 Under Range
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit
Input Channel 01 Over Range
Input Channel 01 Under Range
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 02 Over Range
Input Channel 02 Under Range
Output Channel 00 Open Circuit
Output Channel 00 Hold Last State Mode Active
Output Channel 00 Over Range
Output Channel 00 Under Range
Analog Module Configured
Analog Module Warning (Module Number Dial Changed)
Analog Module Faulted
Analog Module 4
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 120) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00.
Table 472 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00 (Parameter 120)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 121) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 355
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Table 473 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01 (Parameter 121)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
1
INT
2
0
-32768
32767
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 122) reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02.
Table 474 - Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02 (Parameter 122)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
-32768
32767
INT
Analog Module 4 Status
Analog Module 4 Status (Parameter 126) reports the status of Analog Module 4.
Table 475 - Analog Module 4 Status (Parameter 126)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
X
Function
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit
Input Channel 00 Over Range
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 00 Under Range
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit
Input Channel 01 Over Range
Input Channel 01 Under Range
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit
Input Channel 02 Over Range
Input Channel 02 Under Range
Output Channel 00 Open Circuit
Output Channel 00 Hold Last State Mode Active
Output Channel 00 Over Range
Output Channel 00 Under Range
Analog Module Configured
Analog Module Warning (Module Number Dial
Changed)
Analog Module Faulted
356 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Trip / Warning History
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides a trip and warning history in which the last five trips and last five warnings are recorded into nonvolatile storage. A mask is available to limit which trip and warning events are logged to the history's memory.
Trip History
When the E300 Electronic Overload Relay issue a trip, the reason for the trip is
recorded into the Trip History. Table 476 lists the codes that are available for the
trip history records.
Table 476 - Trip History Codes
28
29
30
31
22
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
32
33
34
35
36
37
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Trip History Code
0
1
Description
No Fault Conditions Detected
Motor current overload condition
Phase current Loss is detected in one of the motor phases
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam trip level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below trip level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
Sensing Module boot loader failed to load firmware
Sensing Module output enable open
Sensing Module missing interrupts
Sensing Module not calibrated
Sensing Module frame type failure
Sensing Module flash configuration failure
Sensing Module detected an overrun error
Sensing Module is not responding
Total Real Power (kW) is below trip level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded trip level
Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 357
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
358
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
56
58
59
60
52
53
54
55
44
49
50
51
40
41
42
43
Trip History Code
38
39
86
87
88
90
82
83
84
85
91
92
93
94
77
78
79
81
73
74
75
76
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Description
Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Test trip caused by holding the Test/Reset button for 2 seconds
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
Remote trip command detected
Maximum starts per hour exceeded
Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Control Module CAN0 initialization failure
Control Module CAN0 bus failure
Control Module CAN1 initialization failure
Control Module CAN1 bus failure
Control Module ADC0 failure
Control Module detected too many CRC errors
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
External NVS Chip has detected communication timeout error
External NVS Chip has detected a CRC error
External NVS Chip has detected data out of range
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Trip History Code
95
96
97
98
Trip History 0
Description
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
Test Mode is engaged and current/voltage was detected
Heap memory could not be allocated
Vendor ID hardware fault
Trip History 0 (Parameter 127) reports the most recent trip event.
Trip History 0 (Parameter 127)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Trip History 1
Trip History 1 (Parameter 128) reports the second most recent trip event.
Trip History 1 (Parameter 128)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
99
UINT
Trip History 2
Trip History 2 (Parameter 129) reports the third most recent trip event.
Trip History 2 (Parameter 129)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Trip History 3
Trip History 3 (Parameter 130) reports the fourth most recent trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 359
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Trip History 3 (Parameter 130)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
99
UINT
Trip History 4
Trip History 4 (Parameter 131) reports the fifth most recent trip event.
Trip History 4 (Parameter 131)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Trip History Mask
You can decide which trip events are recorded into the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay’s trip history by using the Trip History Masks.
Current Trip History Mask
Current Trip History Mask (Parameter 139) allows you to select which currentbased trip events are recorded in the trip history.
360 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 477 - Current Trip History Mask (Parameter 139)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Overload Trip
Function
X Phase Loss Trip
X Ground Fault Trip
X Stall Trip
X Jam Trip
X Underload Trip
X Current Imbalance Trip
X L1 Under Current Trip
X L2 Under Current Trip
X L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X L2 Over Current Trip
X L3 Over Current Trip
X L1 Line Loss Trip
X L2 Line Loss Trip
X L3 Line Loss Trip
Voltage Trip History Mask
Voltage Trip History Mask (Parameter 140) allows you to select which voltagebased trip events are recorded in the trip history.
Table 478 - Voltage Trip History Mask (Parameter 140)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under Voltage Trip
X Over Voltage Trip
X Voltage Imbalance Trip
X Phase Rotation Trip
X Under Frequency Trip
X Over Frequency Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Trip History Mask
Power Trip History Mask (Parameter 141) allows you to select which powerbased trip events are recorded in the trip history.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 361
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
362
Table 479 - Power Trip History Mask (Parameter 141)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Under kW Trip
Function
X Over kW Trip
X Under kVAR Consumed Trip
X Over kVAR Consumed Trip
X Under kVAR Generated Trip
X Over kVAR Generated Trip
X Under kVA Trip
X Over kVA Trip
X Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
X Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
X Under Power Factor Leading Trip
X Over Power Factor Leading Trip
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Trip History Mask
Control Trip History Mask (Parameter 142) allows you to select which controlbased trip events are recorded in the trip history.
Table 480 - Control Trip History Mask (Parameter 142)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Test Trip
X PTC Trip
Function
X DeviceLogix Trip
X Operator Station Trip
X Remote Trip
X Blocked Start Trip
X Hardware Fault Trip
X Configuration Trip
X Option Match Trip
X Feedback Timeout Trip
X Expansion Bus Trip
Reserved
Reserved
X Nonvolatile Memory Trip
X Test Mode Trip
Reserved
Analog Trip History Mask
Analog Trip History Mask (Parameter 143) allows you to select which analogbased trip events are recorded in the trip history.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 481 - Analog Trip History Mask (Parameter 143)
Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Trip
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Trip
Warning History
When the E300 Electronic Overload Relay issue a warning, the reason for the
warning is recorded into the Warning History. Table 482 lists the codes that are
available for the warning history records.
Table 482 - Warning History Codes
20
21
22
33
16
17
18
19
34
35
36
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
3
5
Warning History Code Description
0
1
No Warning Conditions Detected
Approaching a motor current overload condition
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor current has exceed the programmed jam warning level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1 Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 363
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
90
91
92
93
85
86
87
88
94
95
98
81
82
83
84
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
68
56
58
60
61
43
44
50
51
39
40
41
42
Warning History Code Description
37
38
Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
A hardware fault condition was detected
364 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Warning History 0
Warning History 0 (Parameter 133) reports the most recent warning event.
Warning History 0 (Parameter 133)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
99
UINT
Warning History 1
Warning History 1 (Parameter 134) reports the second most recent warning event.
Warning History 1 (Parameter 134)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Warning History 2
Warning History 2 (Parameter 135) reports the third most recent warning event.
Trip History 2 (Parameter 135)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 365
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
Warning History 3
Warning History 3 (Parameter 136) reports the fourth most recent warning event.
Warning History 3 (Parameter 136)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0
0
99
1
UINT
2
Warning History 4
Warning History 4 (Parameter 137) reports the fifth most recent warning event.
Warning History 4 (Parameter 137)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
2
1
0
0
99
UINT
Warning History Mask
You can decide which warning events are recorded into the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay’s warning history by using the Warning History Masks.
Current Warning History Mask
Current Warning History Mask (Parameter 145) allows you to select which current-based warning events are recorded in the warning history.
366 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 483 - Current Warning History Mask (Parameter 145)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Overload Warning
Reserved
X Ground Fault Warning
Reserved
X Jam Warning
X Underload Warning
X Current Imbalance Warning
X L1 Under Current Trip
X L2 Under Current Trip
X L3 Under Current Trip
X L1 Over Current Trip
X L2 Over Current Trip
X L3 Over Current Trip
X L1 Line Loss Trip
X L2 Line Loss Trip
X L3 Line Loss Trip
Voltage Warning History Mask
Voltage Warning History Mask (Parameter 146) allows you to select which voltage-based warning events are recorded in the warning history.
Table 484 - Voltage Warning History Mask (Parameter 146)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X
Function
Under Voltage Warning
X Over Voltage Warning
X Voltage Imbalance Warning
X Phase Rotation Warning
X Under Frequency Warning
X Over Frequency Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Warning History Mask
Power Warning History Mask (Parameter 147) allows you to select which powerbased warning events are recorded in the warning history.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 367
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
368
Table 485 - Power Warning History Mask (Parameter 147)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Function
X Under kW Warning
X Over kW Warning
X Under kVAR Consumed Warning
X Over kVAR Consumed Warning
X Under kVAR Generated Warning
X Over kVAR Generated Warning
X Under kVA Warning
X Over kVA Warning
X Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
X Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
X Under Power Factor Leading Warning
X Over Power Factor Leading Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control Warning History Mask
Control Warning History Mask (Parameter 148) allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history.
Table 486 - Control Warning History Mask (Parameter 148)
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved
Function
X PTC Warning
X DeviceLogix Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
X Option Match Warning
X Feedback Timeout Warning
X Expansion Bus Warning
X Number Of Starts Warning
X Operating Hours Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog Warning History Mask
Analog Warning History Mask (Parameter 149) allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Trip Snapshot
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Table 487 - Analog Warning History Mask (Parameter 149)
Bit
Function
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01 Warning
X Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02 Warning
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 156) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 488 - Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage (Parameter 156)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 157) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 489 - Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage (Parameter 157)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 369
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
370
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 158) reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 490 - Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage (Parameter 158)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.0
0.0
6553.5
UINT
2
10
Volts
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power (Parameter 159) reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 491 - Trip Snapshot Total Real Power (Parameter 159)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kW
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power (Parameter 160) reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 492 - Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power (Parameter 160)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
-2000000.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVAR or MVAR
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Metering and Diagnostics Chapter 8
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power (Parameter 161) reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 493 - Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power (Parameter 161)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
0.000
0.000
2000000.000
DINT
4
1000 kVA
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor (Parameter 162) reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage at the time of the most recent trip event.
Table 494 - Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor (Parameter 162)
Default Value
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Type
Size (Bytes)
Scaling Factor
Units
INT
2
10
%
0.0
-100.0
100.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 371
Chapter 8 Metering and Diagnostics
372 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Introduction
Network Design
Chapter
9
EtherNet/IP Communications
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to successfully connect the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module (Catalog
Number 193-ECM-ETR) to an Ethernet network and configure it to communicate to an EtherNet/IP scanner such as an Allen-Bradley Logix controller.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module has dual Ethernet ports that function as an Ethernet switch with RJ45 ports to connect Ethernet cable CAT5 type or better to. Rockwell Automation offers a wide variety of Allen-Bradley Ethernet patch cables with its Bulletin 1585 line of
Ethernet cables (http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Connection-Devices/
RJ45-Network-Media).
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module
supports a Star, Linear, and Ring Ethernet topology. Figure 49
shows an example of a Star Ethernet Topology, in which all Ethernet nodes wire back to a central
Ethernet switch, hub, or router.
Figure 49 - Star Ethernet Topology
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 373
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Rockwell Automation also offers a line of managed and unmanaged
Allen-Bradley Ethernet Switches with its Stratix family of Ethernet switches. See http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communications/Ethernet-
IP-Infrastructure for more information.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module also supports an ethernet Ring topology in which all ethernet nodes are wired in series with one another until a complete network ring is made as shown in
.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports Rockwell Automation's Device Level Ring (DLR) topology as a slave device in which the EtherNet/IP network continues to communicate if one of the network chains is disrupted
Figure 50 - Ring Ethernet Topology
374 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Determining Network
Parameters
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
To operate an EtherNet/IP network, you must define these parameters.
Table 495 - EtherNet/IP Network Parameters
Network Parameter
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Description
The IP address uniquely identifies the module. The IP address is in the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where each xxx is a number from
0...255. Do not use the following IP addresses, as these are reserved values:
• 0.0.0.1...0.255.255.255
• 127.0.0.0...127.255.255.255
• 224.255.255.255...255.255.255.255
Subnet addressing is an extension of the IP address scheme that allows a site to use a single network ID for multiple physical networks. Routing outside of the site continues by dividing the IP address into a net ID and a host ID via the class. Inside a site, the subnet mask is used to redivide the IP address into a custom network ID portion and host ID portion.
NOTE: If you change the subnet mask of an alreadyconfigured module, you must cycle power to the module for the change to take effect.
A gateway connects individual physical networks into a system of networks. When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network, a gateway transfers the data between the two networks.
If DNS addressing is used or if the module is referenced via a host name in an
MSG instruction, the following parameters must be defined.
IMPORTANT Consult with your Ethernet network administrator to determine if these parameters need to be specified.
Table 496 - EtherNet/IP Network Parameters for DNS Addressing
Network Parameter
Host Name
Domain Name
Primary DNS Server Address
Secondary DNS Server Address
Description
A host name is part of a text address that identifies the module. The full text address of a module is: host_name .
domain_name .
A domain name is part of a text address that identifies the domain in which the module resides. The full text address of a module is: host_name .
domain_name . The domain name has a
48-character limit.
This identifies any DNS servers that are used in the network.
You must have a DNS server configured if you specify an
SMTP server with a name. The DNS server converts the domain name or host name to an IP address that can be used by the network.
For more information on DNS addressing, see page 384
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 375
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Setting the IP Network
Address
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module ships with DHCP enabled. You can set the network Internet Protocol (IP) address by using:
• The EtherNet/IP node address selection switches
• A Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) server (for example, the Rockwell Automation BOOTP-DHCP
Server Utility, which is included with Rockwell Software's RSLinx Classic software)
• A web browser and MAC scanner software
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module comes with three node address selection switches that allow you to select the last octet for the IP address 192.168.1.xxx.
Network Information
- MAC Id
- Serial Number
- Firmware Revision
376
Node Address x100 x10
Node Address
001 - 254
255 - 887
889 - 999
888
000
Function
Set IP Address to 192.168.1.xxx
Set IP Address via DHCP or use static IP Address
Reset to factory defaults
Administration mode x1
EXAMPLE When the left dial is set to 1, the middle dial is set to 2, and the right dial is set to 3, the resulting IP address is: 192.168.1.123.
When the node address selection switches are set to a value greater than 255
(excluding 888), the IP address is set to DHCP Enabled or programmed for a static IP address.A power cycle is required for any selection changes to take effect.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility
By default, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication
Module is DHCP Enabled. The BOOTP/DHCP utility is a standalone program that is located in the BOOTPDHCP Server folder accessed from the
Start menu.
IMPORTANT Before starting the BOOTP/DHCP utility, make sure you have the hardware MAC
ID of the module, which is printed on the front of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The MAC ID has a format similar to:
00-0b-db-14-55-35.
This utility recognizes DHCP-enabled devices and provides an interface to configure a static IP address for each device. To assign network parameters via the
BOOTP/DHCP utility, perform this procedure:
1.
Execute the BOOTP/DHCP software.
2.
Choose Tool >Network Settings.
3.
If appropriate for the network, type the subnet mask, gateway address, primary/secondary server addresses, and domain name in their respective fields.
4.
Click OK.
The Request History panel displays the hardware addresses of modules issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests.
5.
Double-click the MAC address of the module to be configured.
NOTE: The MAC address is printed underneath the sliding front cover of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The format of the hardware address resembles: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 377
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
The New Entry window appears with the module's Ethernet Address (MAC).
378
6.
Type the IP address, host name, and a module description.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Cycle power to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module.
9.
To permanently assign this configuration to the module: Select the module in the Relation List panel and click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.
When module power is cycled, it uses the assigned configuration and does not issue a DHCP request.
If you do not click Disable BOOTP/DHCP, on a power cycle, the module clears the current IP configuration and again begins sending DHCP requests.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and MAC Scanner
Software
If you do not have access to a DHCP software utility, you can assign network parameters via a web browser (for example, Microsoft® Internet Explorer) and
Media Access Control (MAC) scanner software (for example, MAC Scanner from Colasoft® - http://www.colasoft.com/). Follow these steps to configure the module using this method.
1.
Locate and identify the MAC ID printed on the label of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. This address has a format that is similar to: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
2.
Connect the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module to the same wide area network (WAN) as your personal computer.
3.
Initiate the MAC scanner software.
4.
Select the appropriate subnet to scan for available MAC addresses.
.
5.
Scan the Subnet for all available MAC addresses
6.
Identify the IP address assigned to the MAC ID of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The IP address will have a format that is similar to 192.168.0.100.
Other Factors to Consider When Assigning Network Parameters
There are other factors to consider when assigning network parameters, which include:
• Network isolation from or integration into the plant/enterprise network.
• Network size. For large networks, even isolated networks, it might be more convenient and safer to use a BOOTP/DHCP server rather than RSLinx software. The BOOTP/DHCP server also limits the possibility of assigning duplicate IP addresses.
• Company policies and procedures that are associated with plant floor network installation and maintenance.
• Level of involvement by information technology personnel in plant floor network installation and maintenance.
• Type of training that is offered to control engineers and maintenance personnel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 379
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Web Server
If the Rockwell Automation DHCP server is used in an uplinked subnet where an enterprise DHCP server exists, a module may get an address from the enterprise server before the Rockwell Automation utility even sees the module. In this case, disconnect the uplink to set the address and configure the module to retain its static address before reconnecting to the uplink. This is not a problem if you have node names configured in the module and leave DHCP enabled.
As a security precaution the embedded web server of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is disabled by default. To temporarily enable the web server to make it permanently available, you must enter into Administration Mode. To do this, set the rotary dials that are located underneath the front cover of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module to 000 and cycle power. The device will then go online with the IP Address used at the time of the previous start-up.
Web Server Security and System Password
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module’s web server allows you to view any diagnostic and parameter information. Security measures are built into the web server to deter a malicious user from making any unwanted EtherNet/IP system changes and E300 configuration parameter edits. When you attempt to make an EtherNet/IP system change or E300 configuration parameter edit, you will be prompted to enter a user name and password.
380
System User Name
The user name Administrator (case sensitive) is the only user name that allows you to make EtherNet/IP system changes or E300 configuration parameter edits.
System Password
For EtherNet/IP Communication Modules with firmware v1.003, the default password is <blank>.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
For EtherNet/IP Communication Modules with firmware v1.004 and higher, the default password is the serial number of the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication
Module which can be found on the home page of the E300 web server.
It is recommended that you change the password for user name Administrator to deter any malicious activity through the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication
Module’s web server. The password can be change on the password configuration web page.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 381
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Resetting the System Password
If the password for user name Administrator is misplaced or forgotten, you can restore the password to the factory default value by turning the rotary dials on the
E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module to 8-8-8 and cycling power. This resets all EtherNet/IP communication settings and E300 configuration parameters back to the factory default values.
Permanently Enabling the Web Server
In Administrative Mode, you can change any configuration parameter of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay including permanently enabling the embedded web server by following these steps:
1.
Enter Administrative Mode by turning the rotary dials to 000 and cycle power on the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
2.
Access the web page
3.
Navigate to Administrative Settings->Network Configuration
4.
You will be prompted for user name and password. Enter "Administrator" for the user name, and enter the appropriate password.
382 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
5.
Enable the Web Server Control and press Apply Changes
Duplicate IP Address
Detection
When you change the IP address or connect the module to an EtherNet/IP network, the module checks to make sure that the IP address assigned to this module does not match the address of any other network device. If the module determines that another device on the network with a matching IP address, the
EtherNet/IP port of the module goes into conflict mode where the Network
Status LED indicator is solid red.
To resolve this conflict, use the following instructions to change the IP address of the module. Then, cycle power to the module or reset the modules by disconnecting and then reconnecting the Ethernet cable.
Two modules could possibly detect a conflict simultaneously. If this occurs, perform this procedure.
1.
Remove the module with the incorrect IP address and correct its conflict.
2.
Cycle power or disconnect the Ethernet cable from the second module and reconnect it.
Behavior of Modules With Duplicate IP Addresses
Devices in conflict over an IP address behave differently depending on whether connections have been established to either of the modules and whether both modules support duplicate IP address detection.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 383
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Table 497 - Device Conflict over Duplicate IP Addresses
If both modules support duplicate IP address detection, then the first started module uses and retains its IP address.
The other module will detect a conflict, give up the IP address and enter conflict mode.
both modules support duplicate IP address detection and are started at roughly the same time, one of the modules surrenders the IP address and enters conflict mode.
one module supports duplicate IP address detection and a second module does not, the second module generally keeps its IP address, regardless of which module first obtains the IP address.
The module that supports duplicate IP address detection will detect the conflict and give up the IP address.
DNS Addressing
To further qualify a module’s address, use DNS addressing to specify a host name for a module, which also includes specifying a domain name and DNS servers.
DNS addressing makes it possible to configure similar network structures and IP address sequences under different domains.
DNS addressing is only necessary if you see the module by host name, such as in path descriptions in MSG instructions.
To use DNS addressing, perform this procedure.
1.
Assign a host name to the module.
NOTE: Contact the network administrator to have a host name assigned. Valid host names should be compliant with IEC-1131-3.
2.
Configure the module's parameters.
In addition to the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address, configure a host name for the module, domain name, and primary/secondary DNS server addresses.
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
File Installation
Before the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication
Module is configured to communicate on an EtherNet/IP network, it must be registered to the software that configures the network (for example,
Rockwell Automation RSLinx Classic and RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP software). Register the module by installing an EDS file. The EDS file for the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can be obtained from one of two locations:
• Embedded in the module
• The Allen-Bradley EDS file download website.
384 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Download the EDS File
Embedded in the Module
The EDS file for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is embedded within the module. Using RSLinx Classic, you can install the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module's EDS file from the RSLinx Classic RSWho screen using these steps:
1.
Open RSLinx Classic and browse the EtherNet/IP network that has the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay. It will be identified with a yellow question mark. Right click on the unrecognized device and select "Upload
EDS File from Device".
2.
Using the EDS Wizard, install the embedded E300 Electronic Overload
Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module EDS file.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 385
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
3.
When finished, RSLinx Classic will recognize the newly registered E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
From the EDS File Download Site
The EDS file for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module can also be downloaded from the Allen-Bradley EDS
File download site. Using a web browser on the personal computer that is connected to the internet, you can download the EDS file by following these steps:
1.
Type http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/ support/networks/eds.page? on the address line of the web browser.
2.
Select EtherNet/IP as the network type, enter 193 for the Bulletin
Number, and click Search.
386 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
3.
Locate the EDS file for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module and download it to the personal computer.
4.
Start the EDS Hardware Installation Tool located at
Start>Programs>Rockwell Software>RSLinx Tools and Add a new device
5.
Using the EDS Wizard, install the downloaded E300 Electronic Overload
Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module EDS file.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 387
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
6.
When finished, RSLinx Classic will recognize the newly registered E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
View and Configure
Parameters
The web server in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module when enabled is able to view and configure parameters for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. You can use the web interface to edit parameters for E300 Electronic Overload Relay if it is not being scanned by an
EtherNet/IP scanner.
Viewing Parameters
Follow the steps below to view parameters using the web interface of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
1.
Using a web browser, open the web page of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module by typing its IP address for the URL.
388 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
2.
Navigate to the Parameters folder and select a parameter group. The example below shows the information from the Current Monitoring parameters.
3.
To increase the update rate of the data being viewed, enter a faster update time in the refresh rate box shown below:
4.
E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module web page displays up to 17 parameters per web page. If more than 17 parameters exist for a parameter group, use the navigation arrows to display the other parameters.
Editing Parameters
Follow the steps below to edit configuration parameters using the web interface of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 389
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
1.
Select a parameter group that contains programmable parameters, then click the Edit button. The value options appears.
2.
Click the down arrow on the pull-down boxes to adjust fixed values and/or enter numerical values in the fields without an arrow to adjust the values.
3.
Click Apply once all parameter edits have been completed. The E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module will download the new parameter values to the device.
390 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
4.
A confirmation window appears. Press OK.
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
NOTE: If you attempt to edit a configuration parameter when a Class 1
EtherNet/IP connection exists between an EtherNet/IP scanner and the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module, a message similar to the one shown below appears when the Apply button is pressed.
Automation Controller
Communications
I/O Messaging
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports two types of EtherNet/IP messaging.
• I/O Messaging - Used for deterministic EtherNet/IP communications with ControlLogix, CompactLogix, SoftLogix, and EtherNet/IP scanners.
Its primary use is to read and write I/O data for control purposes. It can also be used for Automatic Device Configuration, in which an automation controller manages device configuration parameters.
• Explicit Messaging - Used for non-deterministic communications in which the data is not critical for control. Logic explicit messages have a lower priority compared to I/O messages and are used to read and write noncritical data.
RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 software is used to configure I/O messaging between a Logix controller and an E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module on an EtherNet/IP network. An Add-on Profile is available for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/ IP Communication
Module and can be used with RSLogix 5000 version 16 and higher and Studio
5000 version 21 and higher. The E300 Add-on Profile provides a graphical user interface to modify configuration parameters, it provides intuitive input and
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 391
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
392 output tag names, and it enables Automation Device Configuration. You can download the E300 Add-on Profile from: http:// compatibility.rockwellautomation.com/Pages/
MultiProductFindDownloads.aspx?crumb=112&refSoft=0&toggleState=&ver sions=50428.
Automatic Device Configuration enables the Logix controller to manage device configuration data. Every time a Logix controller establishes a connection with a device, the Logix controller will download that device’s configuration data. This allows users to save commissioning time by preprogramming a device offline using RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000. It also removes the need for maintenance personnel to have a computer and special programming software when replacing a device.
Shown in the following pages are three examples and the steps necessary to configure a Logix controller for I/O messaging.
• Pre-configured E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with
Add-on Profile
• Offline E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with Add-on
Profile
• Offline E300 Electronic Overload Relay Integration with a Generic Profile
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not performed while discovering modules or manually adding a E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a
ControlLogix project, any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data will not be retained.
See Preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with an
Add-On Profile on page 392 for information on how to upload configuration
data when adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay to a ControlLogix project online.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not performed while manually adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay offline in an RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project, any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data will not be retained when downloading the project to the Logix controller.
See Preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with an
Add-On Profile on page 392 for information on how to upload configuration
data when adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay to an RSLogix 5000 or
Studio 5000 project offline.
Preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with an Add-On Profile
The E300 Add-on Profile for RSLogix 5000 and Studio 5000 software automatically enables Automatic Device Configuration. The Logix controller will overwrite any existing E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9 when the Logix controller establishes a connection to the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
For E300 Electronic Overload Relays that come preconfigured in an
Allen-Bradley Low Voltage Motor Control Center, in an Allen-Bradley Medium
Voltage Motor Control Center, or in an electrical enclosure from a panel builder or system integrator, you can add the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to a new or existing RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project and retain the configuration information that is stored in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay using
or Manually Adding a New Module
.
Module Discovery
You can add a preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a
ControlLogix processor using module discovery and retain all of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay’s configuration settings. Module discovery is only available for ControlLogix processors. CompactLogix users must manually add an E300 Electronic Overload Relay to an RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project and then manually upload the E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration.
See Manually Adding a New Module on page 399
for information on how to manually add an E300 Electronic Overload Relay and manually upload the configuration.
Module discovery will identify all of the available devices on an EtherNet/IP network that an EtherNet/IP scanner is connected to. You can select a specific preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay that is on the EtherNet/IP network and upload the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s configuration data by following these steps:
1.
Go Online with the ControlLogix controller using RSLogix 5000 or
Studio 5000 software. The ControlLogix controller can be in Run or
Program mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 393
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
2.
Right click on the Ethernet tree of the EtherNet/IP scanner that is in the
ControlLogix chassis and select Discover Modules .
3.
Choose the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to be added to the EtherNet/
IP scanner’s scan list and press Create .
4.
You will be prompted whether you would like to upload the configuration settings from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. Press Upload to read the configuration settings from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not performed during Module
Discovery, any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data will not be retained when adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a
ControlLogix project.
394 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
5.
If the upload is successful, a display will appear indicating the success of this command. Press OK to continue.
If the upload is not successful due to communication errors, a display will appear indicating that the profile will use default settings. Press OK to continue, and press Cancel to abort the Module Discovery process. Repeat steps 1-5.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not successful during Module Discovery, failure to Cancel the Module Discovery process will result in the loss of any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data. This configuration data will not be retained and default values will be used when adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix project.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 395
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
If the upload is not successful due to an E300 configuration trip, a display will appear indicating that the profile will use default settings. Press OK to continue, and press Cancel to abort the Module Discovery process. Read parameters 38 and
39 from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to determine the reason for the configuration trip. Fix the issue and repeat steps 1-5.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not successful during Module Discovery, failure to cancel the Module Discovery process will result in the loss of any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data. This configuration data will not be retained and default values will be used when adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix project.
396 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
6.
Enter a name for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 397
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
7.
Navigate through the E300 Overload Relay device profile tree to make additional configuration edits. When finished, press OK .
8.
A display will appear verifying to create the module online. Press Yes to add the preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay to the Ethernet tree and communications between the E300 Electronic Overload Relay and the ControlLogix controller will begin. The E300 Electronic Overload
Relay’s configuration data will be retained and stored in the ControlLogix controller and in the RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project. Press No to return to the new module profile and make additional edits.
398 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
9.
To access the data provided by the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module, navigate to the input tags created by the Add-on Profile.
10.
To control the output relays or issue a remote reset command to the E300
Electronic Overload Relay navigate to the output tags created by the Addon Profile.
Manually Adding a New Module
You can manually add a preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay offline to any Logix processor, or you can manually add a preconfigured E300 Electronic
Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix processor. You can perform an upload command to retain all of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s configuration settings. Follow the steps provided to manually add an E300 Electronic Overload
Relay and retain its configuration settings with a new or existing RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project. If you are running IntelliCENTER Integration Assistant for Logix 5000, you can skip to step 4 and repeat these steps for each E300
Electronic Overload Relay that was added to the project while the project is offline.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 399
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
1.
Create a new or open an existing RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project and verify that the Logix controller is offline.
For ControlLogix users who want to manually add an E300 Electronic Overload
Relay online, go online with the ControlLogix controller using RSLogix 5000 or
Studio 5000 software. The ControlLogix controller can be in Run or Program mode.
2.
Right click on the Ethernet tree of the EtherNet/IP scanner and select New
Module .
400 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
3.
Search for an E300 Electronic Overload Relay by typing E300 in the search field, select the 193-ECM-ETR E300 Electronic Overload Relay, 2-
Port device profile, and press Create .
4.
Type a name for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay, and press Change to update the module definition.
5.
Press Upload to read the configuration settings from the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not performed, any preconfigured E300
Electronic Overload Relay configuration data will not be retained when downloading an RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project to a Logix controller or when adding a new E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix project.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 401
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
6.
Select the appropriate E300 Electronic Overload Relay that is on the
EtherNet/IP network, and press OK .
7.
If the upload is successful, a display will appear indicating the success of this command. Press OK to continue.
402 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
If the upload is not successful due to communication errors, a display will appear indicating that there was an upload error, and the device profile will use its existing settings. Press OK to continue. Identify and fix the reason for the communication error and press Upload again, or press Cancel to remove any module definition changes.
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not successful when manually adding an
E300 Electronic Overload Relay, failure to cancel the new module addition process will result in the loss of any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload
Relay configuration data. Default values will be used when the RSLogix 5000 or
Studio 5000 project is downloaded to the Logix controller or when adding an
E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix project.
If the upload is not successful due to an E300 configuration trip, a display will appear indicating that the profile will use its existing settings. Press OK to continue. Read parameters 38 and 39 from the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to determine the reason for the configuration trip. Fix the issue and press Upload again, or press Cancel to remove any module definition changes.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 403
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
ATTENTION: If an Upload command is not successful when manually adding an E300 Electronic Overload Relay, failure to cancel the new module addition process will result in the loss of any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload
Relay configuration data. Default values will be used when the RSLogix 5000 or
Studio 5000 project is downloaded to the Logix controller or when adding an
E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix project.
404 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
8.
Additional module definition changes to E300 Electronic Overload Relay can be made. Press OK when finished making all module definition changes.
9.
Press Yes to apply these changes to the module definition and to update the configuration parameters with the data from the upload command.
Pressing No will ignore all changes and return the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay device profile back to its default settings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 405
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
10.
Navigate through the E300 Overload Relay device profile tree to make additional configuration edits. When finished, press OK .
11.
For users who are adding a preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay offline in an RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project, download the updated project to the Logix controller to establish communications between the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay and the Logix controller and to apply these changes to the Logix controller and E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
406
For users who are adding a preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay online to a ControlLogix controller, a display will appear verifying the intent to create a module online.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Press Yes to add the preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay to the
Ethernet tree and establish communications between the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay and the ControlLogix controller will begin. The E300
Electronic Overload Relay’s configuration data will be retained and stored in the
ControlLogix controller and in the RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project.
Press No to return to the new module profile and make additional edits.
12.
To access the data provided by the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module, navigate to the input tags created by the Add-on Profile.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 407
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
13.
To control the output relays or issue a remote reset command to the E300
Electronic Overload Relay navigate to the output tags created by the Addon Profile.
Offline E300 Electronic Overload Relay Logix Integration with Add-on
Profile
The E300 Add-on Profile for RSLogix 5000 and Studio 5000 provides an efficient means to allow you to configure an E300 Electronic Overload Relay offline in a new or existing project. You can take advantage of copying and pasting an offline configured E300 Electronic Overload Relay to quickly configure multiple E300 Electronic Overload Relays.
The E300 Add-on Profile automatically enables Automatic Device
Configuration in which the Logix controller will download the configuration setting changes to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay when the Logix controller establishes a connection to it.
ATTENTION: Any preconfigured E300 Electronic Overload Relay configuration data will not be retained when downloading an RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project to a Logix controller.
408 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Follow the steps provided to integrate an E300 Electronic Overload Relay using the E300 Add-on Profile to a Logix controller offline:
1.
Create a new or open an existing RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project and verify that the Logix controller is offline.
2.
Right-click on the EtherNet/IP scanner within the I/O Configuration folder, then select New Module to open the Select Module Type window.
3.
Select the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication
Module (193-ECM-ETR), then click Create.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 409
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
4.
Enter a name and the IP address for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The name creates tags in RSLogix
5000 or Studio 5000 that can be used to read and write data from the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
5.
Select Change to select the modules and accessories of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay system.
6.
Select the specific E300 Electronic Overload Relay Sensing and Control
Modules and their respective Option Match actions.
410
7.
Right click on the Expansion Bus to add the specific Expansion Bus accessories for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system and select their specific Option Match action. When finished, press OK.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
8.
Configure the E300 Electronic Overload Relay system's Operating Mode
and associated relay output assignments. See Chapter 5
for more information about Operating Modes.
9.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to configure up to eight Datalinks. Select the parameters for the additional data to be included with the input tags. Press OK to complete the module definition.
10.
Next, set the overload protection configuration parameters for your specific motor application by selecting Protection.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 411
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
11.
To configure the other parameters for a Control Module with firmware v3.000 or higher, navigate to the proper display and make the appropriate adjustments.
To configure the other configuration parameters for Control Modules with firmware v1.000 and v2.000, navigate to the configuration tags of the newly added E300 Electronic Overload Relay. Modify the configuration tags directly to
412 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9 enable and adjust the other current-, voltage-, power-, and control-based protection functions of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
12.
When finished, press OK to complete the addition of the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay to the Logix system.
13.
Download the project to the Logix controller, and place the controller into
Run Mode. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is actively communicating with the Logix controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 413
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
14.
To access the data provided by the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module, navigate to input tags created by the Add-on Profile.
15.
To control the output relays or remote reset the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay navigate to the output tags created by the Add-on Profile.
414
Offline E300 Electronic Overload Relay Integration with a Generic
Profile
For users who would like to establish communications between an E300
Electronic Overload Relay and a Logix Controller with Automatic Device
Configuration disabled or between a non-Logix based automation control system, a Generic Profile can be used.
Follow the steps provided to integrate an E300 Electronic Overload Relay using a
Generic device profile to a Logix controller offline:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
1.
Create a new or open an existing RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 project and verify that the Logix controller is offline.
2.
Right-click on the EtherNet/IP scanner within the I/O Configuration folder, then select New Module to open the Select Module Type window.
3.
Select the Generic Ethernet Module, then click Create.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 415
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
4.
Enter a name and the IP address for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The name creates tags in RSLogix
5000 or Studio 5000 that can be used to read and write data from the E300
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
5.
Select Data-DINT for the Comm Format. The Data-DINT format represents the data from the EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary
E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module as a collection of 32-bit values. Set the I/O Assemblies to the following values:
• Input Assembly Instance 199 (Size 39)
• Output Assembly Instance 144 (Size 2)
• Configuration Assembly Instance 120 (Size 0)
6.
Download the project to the controller and go online.
416 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
33
34
35
31
32
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24
21
22
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
INT
0
1
16
17
14
15
18
19
7.
To access the data provided by the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module, navigate to input tags created by the Generic Profile.
represents the Input Assembly data.
Table 498 - Instance 199 - Input (Produced) Assembly
Bit
DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved for Logix
DeviceStaus0
DeviceStaus1
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
OutputStatus
OpStationStatus
TripStsCurrent
WarnStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
WarnStsVoltage
TripStsPower
WarnStsPower
TripStsControl
WarnStsControl
TripStsAnalog
WarnStsAnalog
Reserved
ThermUtilizedPct
20
10 CurrentImbalance
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
AvgPercentFLA
AverageCurrent
L1Current
L2Current
L3Current
GFCurrent
Reserved
AvgVoltageLtoL
L1toL2Voltage
L2toL3Voltage
L3toL1Voltage
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 417
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
418
65
66
63
64
61
62
59
60
57
58
55
56
53
54
51
52
49
50
47
48
45
46
43
44
41
42
39
40
INT
36
37
38
73
74
71
72
69
70
67
68
75
76
77
Bit
DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
18 TotalRealPower
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
TotalReactivePwr
TotalApparentPwr
TotalPowerFactor
Datalink0
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
PtDeviceOuts
AnDeviceOuts
InAnMod1Ch00
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
Reserved
InAnMod2Ch00
InAnMod2Ch01
InAnMod2Ch02
Reserved
InAnMod3Ch00
InAnMod3Ch01
InAnMod3Ch02
Reserved
InAnMod4Ch00
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
For example, E300_Overload:I.Data[12] represents L1 Current as shown below.
8.
To control the output relays or remotely reset the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay, navigate to the output tags created by the Generic Profile.
Table 499 represents the Input Assembly data.
Table 499 - Instance 144 - Output (Consumed) Assembly
INT
0
1
2
3
Bit
DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OutputStatus0
NetworkStart1
NetworkStart2 X
X
X
0
TripReset
EmergencyStart
RemoteTrip
Reserved X X X
X
X
X
X X X
X
X
X
X
HMILED1Green
HMILED2Green
HMILED3Green
HMILED3Red
HMILED4Red
Reserved
1
DLXPtDeviceIn
DLXAnDeviceIn
For example, E300_Overload:O.Data[0].0 represents Relay Output Pt00 as shown below.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 419
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
E-mail/Text
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is capable of sending e-mail messages and text notifications for different trip and warning events using a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server.
The subject and body contents in the e-mail message is created from the:
• Type of trip or warning that is detected
• Device name
• Device description
• Device location
• Contact information
EXAMPLE E-mail Subject:
E300 Overload Relay has detected a fault
E-mail Body:
Fault Status:
Device Name: E300 Overload Relay
Device Description: Motor Starters
Device Location: Bay 6-U29
Contact Info: Contact Person [email protected]
The first word in the e-mail subject is the device name. If a device name is not configured, then the product name attribute from the identity object is used.
420 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
E-mail Configuration
To be able to send an e-mail, the IP address of the host name of a Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server must be configured and notifications must be selected. Follow these steps to configure an e-mail notification.
1.
In the web browser, enter the IP address of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module URL of the web browser.
2.
Select Administrative Settings>Device Identity
3.
Type the Device Identity information into the fields as described below and press Apply.
Device Name
Device Description
Device Location
The name of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
The description of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
The location of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Contact Information The contact information for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
4.
Select Administrative Settings>E-Mail Configuration
5.
Type the information into the e-mail notification fields as stated below.
Multiple e-mail addresses can be entered into the E-mail Recipient field by separating each e-mail address with a semicolon (;). The E-mail Recipient field is limited to 255 characters.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 421
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
E-mail Recipient
E-Mail Sender
SMTP Server
SMTP Username
SMTP Password
SMTP Port
The e-mail address of the person who will receive the notifications.
The e-mail address from which the notification will be sent.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP server address.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP username.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP password.
Consult with the network administrator which SMTP port number to use. Port 25 is the most common SMTP port.
6.
Check the desired notification time, fault conditions, and local conditions to be included in notification e-mails to the recipient. You can change these after the initial configurations.
7.
Click Apply to accept the configuration
8.
When an E300 Electronic Overload Relay event occurs, the e-mail message will look like the following:
422 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
EtherNet/IP Communications Chapter 9
Text Notifications
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can send a text message to a wireless phone by e-mailing the wireless phone's service provider. The format for the text message is provided by the service provider and looks similar to the example formats below.
• AT&T™: 10-digit wireless phone [email protected]
• Sprint®: 10-digit wireless phone [email protected]
Limitations
Based on the functionality of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module, there are some limitations on when the e-mails can be triggered.
• If two events occur at the same time, an e-mail is only sent for the most significant error.
• If the device has been configured to send an e-mail for a lower prioritized event and this event occurs at the same time as a higher prioritized event for which the device has not been programmed to send an e-mail, an e-mail is not sent for either event.
• The Clear e-mail is only sent when all events have been cleared and an event e-mail has previously been sent.
Troubleshooting
Status LED
Network Status (NS)
Color
None
Green, Red,
Not Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
Red
The following table identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting the E300 Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module.
State
—
Flashing (once)
Possible Cause
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not receiving power.
Normal
Flashing
Solid
Flashing
Solid
Corrective Action
Verify that the proper control voltage exists between terminals A1 and A2 on the E300 Control Module.
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is online, but with no connections established.
Normal operating state and the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to a master.
One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out.
Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset. An internal fault exists.
Duplicate EtherNet/IP module address exists. Two modules cannot have the same address.
A fatal communication error occurred.
Check the EtherNet/IP master and its scan list for correct scanner configuration.
No action is required.
Reset the EtherNet/IP master device.
Cycle power to the unit. If the fault still exists, replace the unit.
Change the IP address to a valid setting and reset the device.
Check Ethernet media for proper installation.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 423
Chapter 9 EtherNet/IP Communications
Status LED
Module Status
Link1 or Link2
Color
None
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
Red
None
Green
Green
State
—
Possible Cause
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not receiving power.
Flashing (once) Normal
Flashing
Solid
Flashing
Solid
—
Flashing
Solid
Corrective Action
Check the control power connection on the A1 and A2 terminals of the E300 EtherNet/IP Control Module.
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not being scanned by the EtherNet/IP master.
Normal operating state, the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to its master.
One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out.
Check the Ethernet scan list for the correct scanner configuration.
No action is required.
The E300 Overload Relay is in a fault state.
Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module or verify the validity of the data in the configuration assembly.
Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not properly connected to an Ethernet network.
Cycle power to the device. If the fault still exists, replace the device.
Check the Ethernet cabling to make sure it is properly installed.
The Ethernet network is properly connected.
No action is required.
Communications are occurring on the Ethernet network. No action is required.
424 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Chapter
10
Firmware Updates
Introduction
This chapter provides detailed information about firmware compatibility among the various E300 Electronic Overload Relay modules and provides instructions on how to update firmware for an E300 Electronic Overload Relay module.
Firmware Compatibility
E300 Control Module
E300 Sensing Module
The sensing, control, and communication modules of an E300 Electronic
Overload Relay have their own firmware for the functionality of the module and its subsystems. Each module and its associated subsystems can be updated using the ControlFLASH utility, which is the same utility that is used to download
firmware into a Logix-based controller. Table 500 shows the specific firmware
revisions for all E300 Electronic Overload Relay modules and subsystems for the three system releases.
Table 500 - E300 System Revision Table
E300 Communication Module
E300 System Revision
193-EIO Application
193-EIO Boot Code
193-EIO EDS Files
193-ECM-ETR Application
193-ECM-ETR Boot Code
193-ECM-ETR FPGA
193-ECM-ETR File System
193-ESM Sensing Module
1.034
1.035
2.034
2.035
1.002
1.005
—
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
1.001
1.003
1.005
—
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
1.001
2.002
1.006
—
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
2.002
2.003
1.006
—
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
2.002
3.033
3.001
1.007
3.001
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
2.002
3.049
3.001
1.007
3.001
1.004
2.001
1.008
1.002
2.002
shows which firmware revisions are compatible with the other E300
Electronic Overload Relay modules and their associated subsystems.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 425
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
Table 501 - E300 Firmware Compatibility Table
E300 Communication Module
E300 Sensing Module
E300 Digital I/O Expansion Modules
E300 Control Module
193-ECM-ETR Application
193-ECM-ETR File System
193-ECM-ETR File System
193-ECM-ETR File System
193-ECM-ETR Boot Code
193-ECM-ETR FPGA
193-ESM Sensing Module
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D
193-EXP-DIO-42-120
193-EXP-DIO-42-240
E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module 193-EXP-AIO-31
E300 Operator Stations
193-EOS-SCS
193-EOS-SDS
193-EIO Application
193-EIO Boot Code
193-EIO EDS Files
1.003
1.001
1.004
1.002
—
—
—
—
2.001
1.008
1.001
2.002
—
—
1.002
1.005
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
—
✓
✓
✓
—
✓
—
1.003
1.005
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
—
✓
✓
✓
—
✓
—
2.002
1.006
—
✓
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
2.003
1.006
—
✓
—
—
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
3.001
1.007
3.001
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Updating Firmware
Firmware for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay modules and their associated subsystems can be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download
Center located at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/ support/pcdc.page?
.
426 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
After the firmware has been downloaded and installed, run the ControlFLASH application by selecting ControlFLASH from the Start menu located at Start ->
FLASH Programming Tools -> ControlFlash as shown below.
Select the Local directory to locate the ControlFLASH update file and press
Next to continue.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 427
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
Select the module update file and press Next .
428 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Select the specific device to update and press OK .
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
Select the specific module subsystem to update and press OK .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 429
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
Select the specific firmware revision for the firmware update and press Next .
Verify that you want to update the firmware for that specific module subsystem by pressing Yes .
430 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
The ControlFLASH utility will begin to download the new firmware files. At the end of the download, the device will automatically reset.
When the device finishes its power cycle sequence, a successful firmware update message is displayed. Press OK to finish the firmware update process.
IMPORTANT Do not interrupt power or communications to the device during the firmware update process. Failure of control power or communications could permanently damage the device.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 431
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
E300 Firmware Update
Example
Updating the firmware for an E300 Electronic Overload Relay involves updating multiple internal firmware subsystems. The Communication Module, Control
Module, and Sensing Module have their own firmware. This example explains the process to update an E300 Electronic Overload Relay from v2.034 to v3.033 firmware. Download the firmware update files from
http://compatibility.rockwellautomation.com/Pages/
MultiProductDownload.aspx?crumb=112 .
432
Table 502 contains the firmware files that are associated with v3.033.
Table 502 - E300 Firmware v3.033 Files
E300 Communication Module
E300 Sensing Module
E300 Control Module
E300 System Revision
193-ECM-ETR Application
193-ECM-ETR Boot Code
193-ECM-ETR FPGA
193-ECM-ETR File System
193-ESM Sensing Module
193-EIO Application
193-EIO Boot Code
193-EIO EDS Files
3.033
2.002
3.001
1.007
3.001
1.003
2.001
1.008
1.001
The firmware for the EtherNet/IP communication and sensing module did not change in the update for an E300 Electronic Overload Relay with firmware v2.034 to v3.033. No firmware update is needed for the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module and Sensing Module. However, five control module firmware subsystems changeed. Update the following control module firmware subsystems:
• 193-EIO Boot Code
• 193-EIO Application
• 193-EIO Uncompressed EtherNet/IP EDS File
• 193-EIO Compressed EtherNet/IP EDS File
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
• 193-EIO Compressed DeviceNet EDS File
Control Module Boot Code Firmware Update
1.
To update the firmware for the E300 Control Module Boot Code, start the
ControlFlash Utility, select 193-EIO BootCode , and press Next .
2.
Select the device to update and press OK .
3.
Select the firmware subsystem type 193-EIO Boot Code to update and press OK .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 433
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
4.
Select firmware revision 1.007.1
to update to.
434 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
5.
Verify the firmware revision change and press Finish .
6.
Begin the firmware updating process by pressing Yes .
When the firmware update is successful, the following display appears.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 435
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
Control Module Application Code Firmware Update
1.
To update the firmware for the E300 Control Module Application Code, start the ControlFlash Utility, select 193-EIO Application, and press
Next .
2.
Select the device to update and press OK .
3.
Select the firmware subsystem type 193-EIO Application to update and press OK .
436 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
4.
Select firmware revision 3 .001.12
to update to.
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
5.
Verify the firmware revision change and press Finish .
6.
Begin the firmware updating process by pressing Yes .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 437
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
When the firmware update is successful, the following display appears.
Control Module Uncompressed EtherNet/IP EDS File Firmware Update
1.
To update the embedded uncompressed EtherNet/IP EDS file, start the
ControlFlash Utility, select 193-EIO Uncompressed EDS, and press Next .
438 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
2.
Select the device to update and press OK .
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
3.
Select the firmware subsystem type 193-EIO EDS Files to update and press OK .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 439
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
4.
Select the first firmware revision 3 .001.1
to update to.
5.
Verify the firmware revision change and press Finish .
6.
Begin the firmware updating process by pressing Yes .
440 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
When the firmware update is successful, the following display appears.
Control Module Compressed EtherNet/IP EDS File Firmware Update
1.
To update the embedded compressed EtherNet/IP EDS file, start the
ControlFlash Utility, select 193-EIO Compressed EDS, and press Next .
2.
Select the device to update and press OK .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 441
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
3.
Select the firmware subsystem type 193-EIO EDS Files to update and press OK .
4.
Select the second firmware revision 3 .001.1
to update to.
5.
Verify the firmware revision change and press Finish .
442 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
6.
Begin the firmware updating process by pressing Yes .
When the firmware update is successful, the following display appears.
Control Module Compressed DeviceNet EDS File Firmware Update
1.
To update the embedded compressed DeviceNet EDS file, start the
ControlFlash Utility, select 193-EIO Compressed DNET EDS, and press
Next .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 443
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
2.
Select the device to update and press OK .
3.
Select the firmware subsystem type 193-EIO EDS Files to update and press OK .
444 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Firmware Updates Chapter 10
4.
Select the third firmware revision 3 .001.1
to update to.
5.
Verify the firmware revision change and press Finish .
6.
Begin the firmware updating process by pressing Yes .
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 445
Chapter 10 Firmware Updates
When the firmware update is successful, the following display appears.
Completed Firmware Update
When the E300 Electronic Overload Relay firmware is successfully updated from v2.034 to v3.033, the system information displays the information below.
446 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Introduction
Advisory LEDs
Chapter
11
Troubleshooting
This chapter helps troubleshoot the E300 Electronic Overload Relay using its advisory LEDs and diagnostic parameters.
ATTENTION: Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous. Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel and others who may be exposed to electrical hazards associated with the maintenance activities, follow the local safety-related work practices (for example, the NFPA 70E, Part II, Electrical Safety for Employee
Workplaces, in the United States) when working on or near energized equipment. Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.
Do not work alone on energized equipment.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of a fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to correct a control system or mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.
All E300 Electronic Overload Relay Communication Modules and Operator
Station have two diagnostic status indicators: Power LED and Trip/Warn LED.
You can use these diagnostic status indicators to help identify the state of the
E300 Electronic Overload Relay and the reason for the trip or warning event.
Power LED
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay Power LED identifies the state of the E300
Electronic Overload Relay system.
Table 503 - Power LED
Blinking Green
Solid Green
Device Ready / Operation Mode
Device Active (Current Detected) /
Run Mode
Solid Red Device Error
Blinking Red ➊ Communications Error
Blinking Green/Red ➊ Copy Cat in Progress
➊ Available on Operator Station
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 447
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Trip/Warn LED
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay Power LED identifies the reason for the trip or warning event. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay will display a long and short blinking pattern to identify the reason for the trip or warning event.
Table 504 - Trip / Warn LED
Blinking Red
Blinking Yellow
Trip Event
Warning Event
Listed below are the blink patterns for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay trip and warning events.
Table 505 - Blink Patterns for Trip/Warn Events
Code
Overload
Long Blink Pattern
0
Phase Loss
Ground Fault Current
Stall 0
Jam 0
0
0
Underload 0
Current Imbalance 0
L1 Under Current
L2 Under Current
0
0
L3 Under Current
L1 Over Current
L2 Over Current
L3 Over Current
0
0
0
0
L1 Line Loss
L2 Line Loss
L3 Line Loss
Under Voltage
Over Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Phase Rotation Mismatch
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
Short Blink Pattern
1
4
5
2
3
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
16
1
14
15
4
5
2
3
6
448 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Troubleshooting Chapter 11
Code
Under kW
Over kW
Under kVAR Consumed
Over kVAR Consumed
Under kVAR Generated
Over kVAR Generated
Under kVA
Over kVA
Under PF Lagging
Over PF Lagging
Under PF Leading
Over PF Leading
Test
PTC
DeviceLogix
Operator Station
Remote Trip
Blocked Start
Hardware Fault
Configuration 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Option Match
Feedback Timeout
Expansion Bus
Number Of Starts
Operating Hours
Nonvolatile Memory
Test Mode
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01
4
4
4
4
4
Long Blink Pattern
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
1
2
5
13
14
15
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Short Blink Pattern
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
6
7
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 449
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Resetting a Trip
ATTENTION: Resetting a trip does not correct the cause for the trip. Take corrective action before resetting the trip.
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay trip condition can be reset by taking one of the following actions:
• Actuating the Blue Trip/Reset button on the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay Communication Module
• Actuating the Reset button on the E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Operator Station
• Setting the Trip Reset bit in the E300 Electronic Overload Relay’s Output
Assembly via the communications network
• Actuating a reset signal to one of the assigned digital inputs
• Setting Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) to “Automatic” to allow the unit to automatically reset after an overload trip
• Setting Trip Reset (Parameter 163) to a value of 1, “Trip Reset”
IMPORTANT An overload trip cannot be reset until the value of Percent Thermal Capacity
Utilized (Parameter 1) is below the value set in Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174).
Trip/Warn LED
Troubleshooting Procedures
Trip Description
Test Trip
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault
Possible Cause
1. Operation of the Test/Reset
1. Motor overloaded
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Missing supply phase
2. Poor electrical connection
Corrective Action
1. Operate the Test/Reset button to clear
1. Check and correct source of overload (load, mechanical transmission components, motor bearings).
2. Set parameter values to match the motor and application requirements.
1. Check for open line (for example, blown fuse).
2. Check all power terminations from the branch circuit-protecting device down to the motor for proper tightness. Make sure that the overload connection to the contactor is secure.
3. Contactor operation
4. Improper parameter setting
1. Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
2. Motor winding insulation is decayed
3. Inspect contactor for proper operation.
4. Single-phase applications require that Single/
Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to “single phase”.
1. Check power conductors and motor windings for low resistance to ground.
2. Check motor winding insulation for low resistance to ground.
3. Check for foreign objects.
3. Foreign Object short
4. External ground fault sensor (core balance current transformer) has improper connection
4. Check cable connections.
450 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Troubleshooting Chapter 11
Trip Description
Stall
Jam
PTC
Current Imbalance
1. Motor has not reached full speed by the end of the Stall Enabld Time (Parameter
249)
Possible Cause
2. Improper parameter settings
3. Motor idling
4. Contactor or circuit breaker operation
Corrective Action
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA
Setting (Parameter 171) is set correctly.
1. Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam level
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Motor stator windings overheated
1. Check for source of motor overtemperature (for example, overload, obstructed cooling, high ambient temperature, excessive starts/hour).
2. Thermistor leads short-circuited or broken 2. Inspect thermistor leads for short-circuit or open
1. Imbalance in incoming power
1. Check for the source of the jam (i.e., excessive load or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
2. Motor winding imbalance
1. Check power system (for example, blown fuse).
2. Repair motor, or if acceptable, raise value of
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261), CI
Trip Level
3. Raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level
(Parameter 261) to an acceptable level.
4. Inspect contactor and circuit breaker for proper operation.
Nonvolatile Storage
Fault
1. Firmware Downgrade corrupted:
Nonvolatile memory
2. Internal product failure
Hardware Fault
1. Firmware of sensing module is not compatible with control module firmware
2. Hardware configuration failure
1.Execute the Clear Command to the operating
Statistics, History Logs, and % TCU
2. Consult the factory.
1. Verify firmware revisions of control module and sensing module
2. Update firmware of control module to v2.0 or higher
3. Consult the factory.
4. Verify that the Sensing, Control, and
Communication Module are connected properly.
5. Verify that connection pins between sensing module and control module are not bent.
Configuration Fault
Remote Trip
1. Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to "Single Phase" and current is being sensed in phase L3 during motor operation.
1. For three-phase applications, Single/Three Phase
(Parameter 176) should be set to “Three-Phase”; for single-phase applications, verify that current is flowing through L1 and L2 only.
2. Operating Mode "Overload (Network)" does not have an assigned Trip Relay
3. Illegal configuration value
1. Contact closure of remote sensor (for example, vibration switch).
2. Verify that one of the Output Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) is configured as a "Trip
Relay"
3. Review Invalid Configuration Parameter
(Parameter 38) and Invalid Configuration Cause
(Parameter 39) to identify which configuration parameter is illegal and the reason why.
1. Take corrective action to address the issue that caused the sensor to actuate.
2. Check sensor for proper operation.
Total Starts Warning
1. Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total Starts
(Parameter 207)
Total Operating
Hours Warning
3. Check wiring.
1. Set Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear
Operating Statistics" to reset Starts Counter
(Parameter 29)
1. Operating Time (Parameter 28) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total
Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
1. Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear
Operating Statistics" to reset Operating Time
(Parameter 28)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 451
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Trip Description
Blocked Start
Possible Cause
1. The number of starts count within the past hour period equals the value set in the
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
2. The time expired since the most recent start is less than the value set in the Starts
Interval (Parameter 206)
Corrective Action
1. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to allow more starts/hour.
2. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to shorten the interval between starts.
452 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Appendix
A
Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Table 506 - Motor/Load Ratings
Terminals
Rated Insulation Voltage (U i
)
Rated Operating Voltage (U e
)
IEC:
UL:
Rated Impulse Voltage (U imp
)
Rated Operating Current ( I e
)
Rated Frequency
Short Circuit Ratings
Number of Poles
Application
1/L1, 3/L2, 5/L3, 2/T1, 4/T2, 6/T3
690V AC
690V AC
600V AC
6 kV
See Catalog Number Explanation
45...65 Hz
See Short-Circuit Ratings on page 44
3
Single-phase or Three-phase
Table 507 - Power Supply Ratings
Rated Supply Voltage (U s
)
Operating Range
Maximum Inrush Current
Maximum Power Consumption
E300:
E300 with expansion:
Maximum Power Interruption Time
V min
:
V max
:
24V DC
11…30V DC
3 A for 30 ms
5 ms
5 ms
120V AC
85…132V AC
10 A for 1 ms
6 W
8 W
10 ms
10 ms
240V AC
159…265V AC
8 A for 3 ms
10 ms
10 ms
Table 508 - Output Relay Ratings (Control Module and Expansion Digital Module)
Terminals
Relay 0:
Relay 1:
Relay 2:
Type of Contacts
Rated Thermal Current (I the
)
Rated Insulation Voltage (U i
)
Rated Operating Voltage (U e
)
Rated Operating Current (I e
)
Minimum Operating Current
Rating Designation
Utilization Category
Resistive Load Rating (p.f. = 1.0)
R03/R04
R13/R14
R23/R24
Form A
SPST - NO
5 A
300V AC
250V AC
3 A (@120V AC), 1.5 A (@240V AC)
0.25 A (@110V DC), 0.1 A (@220V DC)
10 mA @ 5V DC
B300
AC-15
5 A, 250V AC
5 A, 30V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 453
Appendix A Specifications
454
Table 508 - Output Relay Ratings (Control Module and Expansion Digital Module)
Inductive Load Rating (p.f. = 0.4)
(L/R = 7 ms)
Short Circuit Current Rating
Recommended Control Circuit Fuse
2 A, 250V AC
2 A, 30V DC
1,000 A
KTK-R-6
(6 A, 600 V)
Rated Number of Operations
Relay 0, Relay 1, and Relay 2:
W/100-C09…100-C43
W/100-C60…100-C85
W/NEMA Size 0…2
W/NEMA Size 3
5,000,000
2,500,000
1,000,000
300,000
Table 509 - Input Ratings (Control Module and Expansion Digital Module)
Terminals
Input 0:
Input 1:
Input 2:
Input 3:
Input 4:
Input 5:
Supply Voltage
Type of Inputs
On-State Voltage
On-State Current (turn-on)
Off-State Voltage
Off-State Current
Transition Voltage
Transition Current
24V DC
11V DC
2 mA
5V DC
1.5 mA
5...11V DC
1.5...2.0 mA
IN0
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
120V AC
Current Sinking
74V AC
5 mA
20V AC
2.5 mA
20…74V AC
2.5…5 mA
240V AC
159V AC
5 mA
40V AC
2.5 mA
40…159V AC
2.5…5 mA
Table 510 - Analog I/O Ratings (Expansion Analog Module)
Bus to In/Out isolation
Group Isolation (In/Out)
Channel to channel isolation
Max. current draw
Max. Surge Current at Power-Up
Input ranges
Input Impedance Tolerances
Input resolution
Module
1000V AC = 1415V DC (1 min.)
1000V AC = 1415V DC (1 min.)
None
85 mA at 24V
0.5 A @ 24V DC for 1 ms
Input Channels
Current: 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Voltage: 0…10V, 1…5V, 0…5V
RTD: 100
, 200
, 500
and 1000
PT385 and Pt3916, 100
Ni618 and Ni672, 10
Cu 426, 604
NiFe 518
Resistance: 0-150
, 0-750
, 0-3000
, 0-6000
Current Impedance: 249
± 1.0%
Voltage Impedance:
10M at 10V in
4M at 5V in
680k at 1V in
12 bits
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Specifications Appendix A
Low Voltage Directive
Table 510 - Analog I/O Ratings (Expansion Analog Module)
Output ranges
Output Resolution
Voltage Output Load
Current Output Load
Output Impedance
Output Open Circuit detect
Output Channels
Current: 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA
Voltage: 0…10V, 0…5V, 1…5V
12 bits
2k
min. at 10V output (5 mA max.), including wire resistance
50
minimum to 750
max
Current: >1M
, Voltage: <1
Current outputs: O.C. detect supported
Voltage outputs: O.C. detect not supported
Max Inductive Load
(current outputs)
Max Capacitive Load
(voltage outputs)
0.1 mH
1
F
Table 511 - Thermistor/PTC Input Ratings (PTC only)
Terminals
Type of Control Unit
Maximum Number of Sensors
Maximum Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain
Trip Resistance
Reset Resistance
Short-circuit Trip Resistance
Maximum Voltage @ PTC Terminals (R
PTC
= 4 k
)
Maximum Voltage @ PTC Terminals (R
PTC
=open)
Response Time
IT1, IT2
Mark A
6
1500
3400
± 150
1600
± 100
25
± 10
7.5V DC
30V DC
800 ms
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay expansion digital modules are tested to comply with EN60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-1:
Control circuit devices and switching elements.
Table 512 - Expansion Digital I/O Modules
Expansion Digital I/O Modules
Digital Output Rated Operational Voltage (U e
):
Digital Output Rated Insulation Voltage (U i
):
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (U imp
):
Conditional Short Circuit Current:
Recommended Control Circuit Fuse:
Utilization Category:
Pollution Degree:
193-EXP-DIO-42-24D 193-EXP-DIO-42-120 193-EXP-DIO-42-240
250V AC
2000Vrms for 1s
250V AC
2000Vrms for 1s
250V AC
2000Vrms for 1s
N/A
1000 A
KTK-R (6 A, 600V)
AC15, DC13
3
N/A
1000 A
KTK-R (6 A, 600V)
AC15, DC13
3
N/A
1000 A
KTK-R (6 A, 600V)
AC15, DC13
3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 455
Appendix A Specifications
Table 513 - Expansion Power Supply Modules
Expansion Power Supply Modules
Rated Operational Voltage (U e
):
Rated Insulation Voltage (U i
):
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage (U imp
):
Conditional Short Circuit Current:
Protection Against Short Circuits:
Utilization Category:
Pollution Degree:
193-EXP-PS-AC
100…250V AC
2640Vrms for 1s
4 kV
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
Environmental Specifications
Table 514 - Environmental Specifications
Ambient Temperature
Storage
Operating
(Open)
(Enclosed)
Humidity
Operating
Damp Heat – Steady State (per IEC 68-2-3)
Damp Heat – Cyclic (per IEC 68-2-30)
Cooling Method
Vibration (per IEC 68-2-6)
Shock (per IEC 68-2-27)
Maximum Altitude
Pollution Environment
Terminal Marking
Degree of Protection
–40…+85
C (–40…+185
F)
–20…+55
C (–4…+131
F)
➋➌
–20…+40
C (–4…+104
F) ➌➍
5…95% Non-condensing
92% r.h., 40
C (104
F), 56 days
93% r.h., 25
C/40
C (77
F/104
F), 21 Cycles
Natural Convection
2.5G operating, 5 G non-operating
30 G
2000 m ➊
Pollution Degree 3
EN 50012
IP20
➊
Current ratings must be derated at altitudes greater than 2000 m
➋ Temperature rating based on 120V AC control module with 1 A going through relays 0, 1, and 2.
➌
Temperature rating based on 24V DC control module with four digital inputs active and 0.2 A going through relays 0, 1, and 2.
➍
Temperature rating based on 120V AC or 240V AC control module with 5A going through relays 0, 1, and 2.
NOTE: The E300 Electronic Overload Relay expansion power supplies (Cat.
Nos. 193-EXP-PS-AC and 193-EXP-PS-DC) surrounding air temperature must not exceed 55 °C (131 °F).
Table 515 - Temperature Derating
Control Module
Voltage
Relay 0
Current
Relay 1
Current
Open Application
Enclosed
Application
120/240V AC
24V DC
120/240V AC
24V DC
5.0 A
5.0 A
0.2 A
5.0 A
1.0 A
5.0 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
1.0 A
5.0 A
0.2 A
1.0 A
1.0 A
1.0 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
1.0 A
5.0 A
0.2 A
1.0 A
1.0 A
1.0 A
0.2 A
0.2 A
Relay 2
Current
Number of
Digital Inputs
Active
4
4
6
4
4
6
4
6
Operating Temperature
Range
-20…+55 °C (-4…+131 °F)
-20…+50 °C (-4…+122 °F)
-20…+55 °C (-4…+131 °F)
-20…+50 °C (-4…+122 °F)
-20…+30 °C (-4…+86 °F)
-20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F)
-20…+40 °C (-4…+104 °F)
-20…+30 °C (-4…+86 °F)
456 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Specifications Appendix A
Electromagnetic
Compatibility Specifications
Table 516 - Electromagnetic Compatibility Specifications
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
Test Level:
Performance Criteria:
RF Immunity
Test Level:
Performance Criteria:
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
Test Level:
Performance Criteria:
Surge Immunity
Test Level:
Performance Criteria:
Radiated Emissions
Conducted Emissions
8kV Air Discharge
6kV Contact Discharge
1 ➊➋
10V/m
1 ➊➋
4kV (Power)
2kV (Control and Comm)
1
➊➋
2kV (L-E)
1kV (L-L)
1
➊➋
Class A
Class A
➊
Performance Criteria 1 requires the DUT to experience no degradation or loss of performance.
➋
Environment 2.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 457
Appendix A Specifications
Protection
Table 517 - Protection
Phase Loss
Ground Fault
Thermistor (PTC)
Current Imbalance
Communication Fault
Communication Idle
Remote Trip
Blocked Start/Start Inhibit
Under Voltage L-L
Over Voltage L-L
Voltage Unbalance
Phase Rotation
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
Under Real Power (kW)
Over Real Power (kW)
Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR)
Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR)
Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR)
Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR)
Under Apparent Power (kVA)
Over Apparent Power (kVA)
Under Power Factor Lagging (-PF)
Over Power Factor Lagging (-PF)
Under Power Factor Leading (+PF)
Over Power Factor Leading (+PF)
Power Value Overflow (kW, kVAR or KVA)
Analog Over Level
Table 518 - Overload Protection
Type of Relay
Nature of Relay
FLA Setting
Trip Rating
Trip Class
Reset Mode
Overload Reset Level
Trip Warning
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Ambient Compensated Time-Delay
Phase Loss Sensitive
Solid-State
See
Full Load Amps Setting on page 133
120% FLA
5…30
Automatic or Manual
1…100% TCU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
458 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Specifications Appendix A
Accuracy
Table 519 - Ground Fault Protection (External Ground Fault Module)
Type
Intended Use
Classification (Per UL 1053)
Protection Range
Trip and Warning Time Delay
Protection Inhibit Time
Core Balanced
Equipment Protection
Class I
20…100 mA
100…500 mA
200 mA…1.0 A
1.0…5.0 A
0.1…25.0 s
0…250 s
Metering
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay metering accuracy is listed below:
Table 520 - Metering Accuracy
Current
Voltage
Power
±2% of Sensing Module Current Range
±2% of Sensing Module Voltage Range
±5%
Protection Timers
All E300 Electronic Overload Relay trip timers shall have a resolution of ±0.1 s or
0.1 s/25 s (whichever is greater).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 459
Appendix A Specifications
Notes:
460 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Appendix
B
Parameter List
Overview
This appendix lists all accessible parameters of the E300™ overload relay in numerical order.
The setting range for each parameter is provided to assist especially for applications where it is desirable to set values from a logic controller via a network connection.
Information values provided include the following:
Value
Setting Range
Scale Factor
Default
Function
Indicated as raw numerical values.
Indicate the decimal precision associated with each parameter. This must be given close attention when writing or reading values.
Indicate the factory pre-programmed values.
Group
Device Monitor 1
Param
No.
Parameter Name
ThermUtilizedPct I.PercentTCU
Device Profile Tag Name
2 OLTimeToTrip
3
4
5
OLTimeToReset
TripStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
I.Protection.OverloadTrip
I.Protection.PhaseLossTrip
I.Protection.GroundFaultCurrentTrip
I.Protection.StallTrip
I.Protection.JamTrip
I.Protection.UnderloadTrip
I.Protection.CurrentImbalanceTrip
I.Protection.L1UnderCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L2UnderCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L3UnderCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L1OverCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L2OverCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L3OverCurrentTrip
I.Protection.L1LineLossTrip
I.Protection.L2LineLossTrip
I.Protection.L3LineLossTrip
I.Protection.UnderVoltageTrip
I.Protection.OverVoltageTrip
I.Protection.VoltageImbalanceTrip
I.Protection.PhaseRotationMismatchTrip
I.Protection.UnderFrequencyTrip
I.Protection.OverFrequencyTrip
Description
% Thermal
Capacity Used
Time until an overload trip
Type
USINT 1
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
1
Scale
Factor
0
0
Min
1 0 Time until OL trip can be reset
UINT 2
Trip Status bits for
Current
UINT 2 1
Trip Status bits for
Voltage
UINT 2 1
100
9999
9999
Max
Bit0= OverloadTrip
Bit1= PhaseLossTrip
Bit2= GroundFaultTrip
Bit3= StallTrip
Bit4= JamTrip
Bit5= UnderloadTrip
Bit6= CurrentImbalTrip
Bit7= L1UnderCurrTrip
Bit8= L2UnderCurrTrip
Bit9= L3UnderCurrTrip
Bit10= L1OverCurrenTrip
Bit11= L2OverCurrenTrip
Bit12= L3OverCurrenTrip
Bit13= L1LineLossTrip
Bit14= L2LineLossTrip
Bit15= L3LineLossTrip
Bit0= UnderVoltageTrip
Bit1= OvervoltageTrip
Bit2= VoltageUnbalTrip
Bit3= PhaseRotationTrp
Bit4= UnderFreqTrip
Bit5= OverFreqTrip
0
Default Units
%
0
0 s
Second s
Second
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 461
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Device Monitor
(continued)
6
Param
No.
Parameter Name
TripStsPower
7 TripStsControl
Device Profile Tag Name
I.Protection.UnderRealPowerTrip
I.Protection.OverRealPowerTrip
I.Protection.UnderReactivePowerConsumedTrip
I.Protection.OverReactivePowerConsumedTrip
I.Protection.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedTrip
I.Protection.OverReactivePowerGeneratedTrip
I.Protection.UnderApparentPowerTrip
I.Protection.OverApparentPowerTrip
I.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLaggingTrip
I.Protection.OverPowerFactorLaggingTrip
I.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLeadingTrip
I.Protection.OverPowerFactorLeadingTrip
I.Protection.TestTrip
I.Protection.PTCTrip
I.Protection.OperatorStationTrip
I.Protection.RemoteTrip
I.Protection.BlockedStartTrip
I.Protection.HardwareFaultTrip
I.Protection.ConfigurationTrip
I.Protection.ModuleMismatchTrip
I.Protection.ExpansionBusTrip
8 TripStsAnalog
I.Protection.NVMErrorTrip
I.Protection.MCCTestPositionTrip
I.Protection.Analog1Ch00Trip
I.Protection.Analog1Ch01Trip
I.Protection.Analog1Ch02Trip
I.Protection.Analog2Ch00Trip
I.Protection.Analog2Ch01Trip
I.Protection.Analog2Ch02Trip
I.Protection.Analog3Ch00Trip
I.Protection.Analog3Ch01Trip
I.Protection.Analog3Ch02Trip
I.Protection.Analog4Ch00Trip
I.Protection.Analog4Ch01Trip
I.Protection.Analog4Ch02Trip
9
10
Reserved
WarnStsCurrent
11
12
WarnStsVoltage
WarnStsPower
I.Protection.OverloadWarning
I.Protection.GroundFaultCurrentWarning
I.Protection.JamWarning
I.Protection.UnderloadWarning
I.Protection.CurrentImbalanceWarning
I.Protection.L1UnderCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L2UnderCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L3UnderCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L1OverCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L2OverCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L3OverCurrentWarning
I.Protection.L1LineLossWarning
I.Protection.L2LineLossWarning
I.Protection.L3LineLossWarning
I.Protection.UnderVoltageWarning
I.Protection.OverVoltageWarning
I.Protection.VoltageImbalanceWarning
I.Protection.PhaseRotationMismatchWarning
I.Protection.UnderFrequencyWarning
I.Protection.OverFrequencyWarning
I.Protection.UnderRealPowerWarning
I.Protection.OverRealPowerWarning
I.Protection.UnderReactivePowerConsumedWarning
I.Protection.OverReactivePowerConsumedWarning
I.Protection.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedWarning
I.Protection.OverReactivePowerGeneratedWarning
I.Protection.UnderApparentPowerWarning
I.Protection.OverApparentPowerWarning
I.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLaggingWarning
I.Protection.OverPowerFactorLaggingWarning
I.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLeadingWarning
I.Protection.OverPowerFactorLeadingWarning
Warning Status bits for Current
UINT 2
Warning Status bits for Voltage
Warning Status bits for Power
UINT
UINT
2
2
Description
Trip Status bits for
Power
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
Trip Status bits for
Control
Trip Status bits for
Analog
UINT
UINT
2
2
1
1
Min Max
Bit0= UnderKWTrip
Bit1= OverKWTrip
Bit2= UnderKVARConTrip
Bit3= OverKVARConTrip
Bit4= UnderKVARGenTrip
Bit5= OverKVARGenTrip
Bit6= UnderKVATrip
Bit7= OverKVATrip
Bit8= UnderPFLagTrip
Bit9= OverPFLagTrip
Bit10= UnderPFLeadTrip
Bit11= OverPFLeadTrip
Bit0= TestTrip
Bit1= PTCTrip
Bit2= DLXTrip
Bit3= OperStationTrip
Bit4= RemoteTrip
Bit5= BlockedStartTrip
Bit6= HardwareFltTrip
Bit7= ConfigTrip
Bit8= OptionMatchTrip
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutTrip
Bit10= ExpansionBusTrip
Bit11= Reserved
Bit12 =Reserved
Bit13= NVSTrip
Bit 14=TestMode Trip
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Trip
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Trip
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Trip
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Trip
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Trip
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch01Trip
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Trip
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Trip
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Trip
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Trip
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Trip
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Trip
0
0
0
Default Units
1
1
1
Bit0= OverloadWarning
Bit1= Reserved
Bit2= GroundFltWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= JamWarning
Bit5= UnderloadWarning
Bit6= CurrentImbalWarn
Bit7= L1UnderCurrWarn
Bit8= L2UnderCurrWarn
Bit9= L3UnderCurrWarn
Bit10= L1OverCurrenWarn
Bit11= L2OverCurrenWarn
Bit12= L3OverCurrenWarn
Bit13= L1LineLossWarn
Bit14= L2LineLossWarn
Bit15= L3LineLossWarn
Bit0= UnderVoltageWarn
Bit1= OvervoltageWarn
Bit2= VoltageUnbalWarn
Bit3= PhaseRotationWrn
Bit4= UnderFreqWarning
Bit5= OverFreqWarning
Bit0= UnderKWWarning
Bit1= OverKWWarning
Bit2= UnderKVARConWarn
Bit3= OverKVARConWarn
Bit4= UnderKVARGenWarn
Bit5= OverKVARGenWarn
Bit6= UnderKVAWarning
Bit7= OverKVAWarning
Bit8= UnderPFLagWarn
Bit9= OverPFLagWarn
Bit10= UnderPFLeadWarn
Bit11= OverPFLeadWarn
0
0
0
462 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Device Monitor
(continued)
Param
No.
13
Parameter Name
WarnStsControl
Device Profile Tag Name
I.Protection.PTCWarning
14
15
16
17
18
WarnStsAnalog
Reserved
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
OutputStatus
19 OpStationStatus
I.Protection.ModuleMismatchWarning
I.Protection.ExpansionBusWarning
I.Protection.NumberOfStartsWarning
I.Protection.OperatingHoursWarning
I.Protection.Analog1Ch00Warning
I.Protection.Analog1Ch01Warning
I.Protection.Analog1Ch02Warning
I.Protection.Analog2Ch00Warning
I.Protection.Analog2Ch01Warning
I.Protection.Analog2Ch02Warning
I.Protection.Analog3Ch00Warning
I.Protection.Analog3Ch01Warning
I.Protection.Analog3Ch02Warning
I.Protection.Analog4Ch00Warning
I.Protection.Analog4Ch01Warning
I.Protection.Analog4Ch02Warning
I.Pt00Data
I.Pt01Data
I.Pt02Data
I.Pt03Data
I.Pt04Data
I.Pt05Data
I.Digital1Pt00Data
I.Digital1Pt01Data
I.Digital1Pt02Data
I.Digital1Pt03Data
I.Digital2Pt00Data
I.Digital2Pt01Data
I.Digital2Pt02Data
I.Digital2Pt03Data
I.Digital3Pt00Data
I.Digital3Pt01Data
I.Digital3Pt02Data
I.Digital3Pt03Data
I.Digital4Pt00Data
I.Digital4Pt01Data
I.Digital4Pt02Data
I.Digital4Pt03Data
I.Pt00Readback
I.Pt01Readback
I.Pt02Readback
I.Digital1Pt00Readback
I.Digital1Pt01Readback
I.Digital2Pt00Readback
I.Digital2Pt01Readback
I.Digital3Pt00Readback
I.Digital3Pt01Readback
I.Digital4Pt00Readback
I.Digital4Pt01Readback
I.OperatorStationI
I.OperatorStationII
I.OperatorStationLocalRemote
I.OperatorStationO
I.OperatorStationReset
I.OperatorStationILEDReadback
I.OperatorStationIILEDReadback
I.OperatorStationLocalLEDReadback
I.OperatorStationRemoteLEDReadback
I.OperatorStationOLEDReadback
Description
Warning Status bits for Control
Warning Status bits for Analog
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
UINT 2 1
Min Max
BBit0= Reserved
Bit1= PTCWarning
Bit2= DLXWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= Reserved
Bit5= Reserved
Bit6= Reserved
Bit7= Reserved
Bit8= OptionMatchWarn
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutWarn
Bit10= ExpansionBusWarn
Bit11= PMNumberOfStarts
Bit12= PMOperatingHours
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Warn
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Warn
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Warn
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Warn
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Warn
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch02Warn
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Warn
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Warn
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Warn
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Warn
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Warn
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Warn
0
0
Default Units
Status of Digital
Inputs
UINT 2
Status of Digital
Expansion Module
Inputs
Status of Digital
Outputs
Status of Operator
Station Buttons and LEDs
UINT
UINT
UINT
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Bit0= InputPt00
Bit1= InputPt01
Bit2= InputPt02
Bit3= InputPt03
Bit4= InputPt04
Bit5= InputPt05
Bit0= InputDigMod1Pt00
Bit1= InputDigMod1Pt01
Bit2= InputDigMod1Pt02
Bit3= InputDigMod1Pt03
Bit4= InputDigMod2Pt00
Bit5= InputDigMod2Pt01
Bit6= InputDigMod2Pt02
Bit7=1nputDigMod2Pt03
Bit8= InputDigMod3Pt00
Bit9= InputDigMod3Pt01
Bit10= InputDigMod3Pt02
Bit11= InputDigMod3Pt03
Bit12= InputDigMod4Pt00
Bit13= InputDigMod4Pt01
Bit14= InputDigMod4Pt02
Bit15= InputDigMod4Pt03
Bit0= OutputPt00
Bit1= OutputPt01
Bit2= OutputPt02
Bit3= OutDigMod1Pt00
Bit4= OutDigMod1Pt01
Bit5= OutDigMod2Pt00
Bit6= OutDigMod2Pt01
Bit7= OutDigMod3Pt00
Bit8= OutDigMod3Pt01
Bit9= OutDigMod4Pt00
Bit10= OutDigMod4Pt01
Bit0= OpStationStart1
Bit1= OpStationStart2
Bit2= OSLocalRemote
Bit3= OpStationStop
Bit4= OpStationReset
Bit5= Reserved
Bit6= Reserved
Bit7= Reserved
Bit8= OSLED1Green
Bit9= OSLED2Green
Bit10= OSLED3Amber
Bit11= OSLED3Red
Bit12= OSLED4Red
0
0
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 463
Appendix B Parameter List
464
Group
Device Monitor
(continued)
Param
No.
20
Parameter Name
DeviceStatus0
Device Profile Tag Name
I.TripPresent
I.WarningPresent
I.InvalidConfiguration
I.MotorCurrentPresent
I.GroundFaultCurrentPresent
I.MotorVoltagePresent
I.EmergencyStartEnabled
I.DeviceLogixEnabled
I.FeedbackTimeoutEnabled
I.OperatorStationPresent
I.VoltageSensingPresent
I.InternalGroundFaultSensingPresent
I.ExternalGroundFaultSensingPresent
I.PTCSensingPresent
I.Ready
21 DeviceStatus1 I.ContolModule24VDCPresent
I.ControlModule120VACPresent
I.ControlModule240VACPresent
I.SensingModule30APresent
I.SensingModule60APresent
I.SensingModule100APresent
I.SensingModule200APresent
I.DigitalModule1Present
I.DigitalModule2Present
I.DigitalModule3Present
I.DigitalModule4Present
I.AnalogModule1Present
I.AnalogModule2Present
I.AnalogModule3Present
I.AnalogModule4Present
22
23
Firmware
ControlModuleID
24 SensingModuleID
25 OperStationID
26 DigitalModuleID
27 AnalogModuleID
28 OperatingTime
Description Type
Device Status bits UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
Device Status bits UINT 2 1
1000
Min Max
Bit0= TripPresent
Bit1= WarningPresent
Bit2= InvalidConfig
Bit3= CurrentPresent
Bit4= GFCurrentPresent
Bit5= VoltagePresent
Bit6= EmergencyStartEn
Bit7= DeviceLogixEn
Bit8= FeebckTimeoutEn
Bit9= OperatorStation
Bit10= VoltageSensing
Bit11= InternGFSensing
Bit12= ExternGFSensing
Bit13= PTCSensing
Bit14= Ready
Bit 15=Admin Mode Active
Bit0= 24VoltControl
Bit1= 120VoltControl
Bit2= 240VoltControl
Bit3= CurrentSense30A
Bit4= CurrentSense60A
Bit5= CurrentSense100A
Bit6= CurrentSense200A
Bit7= DigitalModule1
Bit8= DigitalModule2
Bit9= DigitalModule3
Bit10= DigitalModule4
Bit11= AnalogModule1
Bit12= AnalogModule2
Bit13= AnalogModule3
Bit14= AnalogModule4
0 65535 Firmware Revision
Number
UINT 2
Control Module
Type Detected
USINT 1 1
Sensing Module
Types Detected
Operator Station
Types Detected
Expansion Digital
Module Types
Detected
Expansion Bus
Analog Module
Types
Time unit has been powered on
USINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
0= Unknown
1= 6In3Out24VDC
2= 4In3Out120VAC
3= 4In3Out240VAC
4= 4In2OutGFPTC24V
5= 2In2OutGFPTC120V
6= 2In2OutGFPTC240V
0= Unknown
1= VIGPt5to30Amp
2= VIG6to60Amp
3= VIG10to100Amp
4= VIG20to200Amp
5= IGPt5to30Amp
6= IG6to60Amp
7= IG10to100Amp
8= IG20to200Amp
9= IPt5to30Amp
10= I6to60Amp
11= I10to100Amp
12= I20to200Amp
0= Unknown
1= NoStation
2= ControlStation
3= DiagStation
Bit0= DigitalMod1[0]
Bit1= DigitalMod1[1]
Bit2= DigitalMod1[2]
Bit3= DigitalMod2[0]
Bit4= DigitalMod2[1]
Bit5= DigitalMod2[2]
Bit6= DigitalMod3[0]
Bit7= DigitalMod3[1]
Bit8= DigitalMod3[2]
Bit9= DigitalMod4[0]
Bit10= DigitalMod4[1]
Bit11= DigitalMod4[2]
Bit0= AnalogMod1[0]
Bit1= AnalogMod1[1]
Bit2= AnalogMod2[0]
Bit3= AnalogMod2[1]
Bit4= AnalogMod3[0]
Bit5= AnalogMod3[1]
Bit6= AnalogMod4[0]
Bit7= AnalogMod4[1]
0 65535
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
1001
Hrs
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Device Monitor
(continued)
31
32
33
34
35
36
Param
No.
29
30
Parameter Name
StartsCounter
Starts Available
37
38
39
TimeToStart
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
InvaldCfgParam
InvaldCfgCause
Current Monitor
Voltage Monitor
55
56
57
53
54
51
52
44
45
40
41
42
43
46
47
48
49
50
GFCurrent
CurrentImbal
L1toL2Voltage
L2toL3Voltage
L3toL1Voltage
AvgVoltageLtoL
L1toNVoltage
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
L1Current
L2Current
L3Current
AverageCurrent
L1PercentFLA
L2PercentFLA
L3PercentFLA
AvgPercentFLA
58 L2toNVoltage
I.L1Current
I.L2Current
I.L3Current
I.AvgCurrent
I.AvgPercentFLA
I.GroundFaultCurrent
I.CurrentImbalance
I.L1L2Voltage
I.L2L3Voltage
I.L3L1Voltage
I.AvgLLVoltage
59 L3toNVoltage
Device Profile Tag Name Description Type
Number of starts UINT 2
Number of Starts
Available
USINT 1
Data Size
(bytes)
1
1
Scale
Factor
The Time to Start UINT 2 1
0
0
0
Min Max
65535
120
3600
Virtual RTC Year UINT 2
Virtual RTC Month UINT 2
Virtual RTC Day UINT 2
Virtual RTC Hour UINT 2
Virtual RTC Minute UINT 2
Virtual RTC Second UINT 2
Number of incorrectly configured parameter
UINT 2
Description of error USINT 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9999
12
31
23
59
59
9999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
0 s
Second
0 0=NoError
1=ValueOverMax
2=Value UnderMin
3=IllegalValue
4=L3CurrentDetected
5=CopyCat Error
6-50 = Reserved
The actual L1
Phase Current.
The actual L2
Phase Current.
DINT
DINT
4
4
The actual L3
Phase Current.
DINT 4
Average of Phase
Currents.
DINT 4
L1 Current in %FLA UINT 2
L2 Current in %FLA UINT 2
L3 Current in %FLA UINT 2
Average Current in
%FLA
UINT 2
UINT 2 The Ground Fault
Current.
Percent Current
Imbalance
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-Line
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-Line
USINT
UINT
UINT
1
2
2
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-Line
Average RMS
Voltage Line-Line
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-
Neutral
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-
Neutral
3 Phase RMS
Voltage Line-
Neutral
UINT 2
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
10
10
10
10
100
1
100
100
100
100
10
10
10
10
10 0
10 0
Volt
Volt
Volt
Amps
%
Volt
Volt
Amps
Amps
Amps
Amps
%
%
%
%
Volt
Volt
9999
200
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
2000000000 0
2000000000 0
2000000000 0
2000000000 0
10000
10000
10000
10000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65535 0
65535 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 465
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Voltage Monitor
(Continued)
Param
No.
60
Parameter Name
AvgVoltageLtoN
61
62
63
VoltageUnbalance
VoltageFrequency
VPhaseRotation
Device Profile Tag Name
Power Monitor
Energy Monitoring 80
81
78
79
84
85
82
83
76
77
74
75
72
73
70
71
66
67
68
69
64
65
L1RealPower
L2RealPower
L3RealPower
TotalRealPower
L1ReactivePower
L2ReactivePower
L3ReactivePower
TotalReactivePwr
L1ApparentPower
L2ApparentPower
L3ApparentPower
TotalApparentPwr
L1PowerFactor
L2PowerFactor
L3PowerFactor
TotalPowerFactor kWhTimes10E9 kWhTimes10E6 kWhTimes10E3 kWhTimes10E0 kWhTimes10E-3 kVARhCon10E9
I.TotalRealPower
I.TotalReactivePower
I.TotalApparentPower
I.PowerFactor
86 kVARhCon10E6
87 kVARhCon10E3
88 kVARhCon10E0
Phase L1 Apparent
Power
DINT 4
Phase L2 Apparent
Power
DINT 4
Phase L3 Apparent
Power
DINT 4
Total Apparent
Power
DINT 4
INT 2 Phase L1 True
Power Factor (PF)
Phase L2 True
Power Factor (PF)
Phase L3 True
Power Factor (PF)
Total True Power
Factor (PF)
INT
INT
INT
2
2
2
2 Total Real Energy
(kWh) Word 10^9
Total Real Energy
(kWh) Word 10^6
Total Real Energy
(kWh) Word 10^3
Total Real Energy
(kWh) Word 10^0
INT
INT
INT
INT
Total Real Energy
(kWh) Word 10^-3
INT
INT Total Reactive
Energy Consumed
(kVARh) Word
10^9
Total Reactive
Energy Consumed
(kVARh) Word
10^6
INT
Total Reactive
Energy Consumed
(kVARh) Word
10^3
Total Reactive
Energy Consumed
(kVARh) Word
10^0
INT
INT
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Description
Average RMS
Voltage Line-
Neutral
Voltage Unbalance USINT 1
Voltage Frequency UINT 2
UINT 2 Voltage Phase
Rotation
(ABC or ACB)
Phase L1 Real
Power.
DINT 4
Phase L2 Real
Power.
DINT 4
Phase L3 Real
Power.
DINT 4
Total Real Power DINT 4
DINT 4 Phase L1 Reactive
Power
Phase L2 Reactive
Power
Phase L3 Reactive
Power
Total Reactive
Power
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
10
Scale
Factor
DINT
DINT
DINT
4
4
4
1
10
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
10
10
10
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
Min Max
0
0
255
2500
0= NoRotation
1= ABC
2= ACB
0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
0
0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
0
0
0
0
-1000
-1000
-1000
-1000
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
65535
2000000000
2000000000
2000000000
2000000000
1000
1000
1000
1000
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
Volt
%
Hz kW kW kW kW kVAR kVAR kVAR kVAR kVA kVA kVA kVA
%
%
%
%
466 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Energy Monitoring
(Continued)
Param
No.
89
Parameter Name kVARhCon10E-3
90 kVARhGen10E9
91 kVARhGen10E6
92 kVARhGen10E3
93 kVARhGen10E0
94 kVARhGen10E-3
95 kVARhNet10E9
96 kVARhNet10E6
97 kVARhNet10E3
98 kVARh Net 10E0
99 kVARhNet10E-3
100 kVAhTimes10E9
101 kVAhTimes10E6
102 kVAhTimes10E3
103 kVAhTimes10E0
104 kVAhTimes10E-3
105
106
107
108
109
110 kWDemand
MaxkWDemand
VARDemand
MaxVARDemand
VADemand
MaxVADemand
Device Profile Tag Name Description Type
Total Reactive
Energy Net
(kVARh) Word
10^3
Total Reactive
Energy Net
(kVARh) Word
10^0
Total Reactive
Energy Net
(kVARh) Word
10^-3
Total Apparent
Energy (kVAh)
Word 10^9
Total Reactive
Energy Consumed
(kVARh) Word
10^-3
Total Reactive
Energy Generated
(kVARh) Word
10^9
Total Reactive
Energy Generated
(kVARh) Word
10^6
Total Reactive
Energy Generated
(kVARh) Word
10^3
Total Reactive
Energy Generated
(kVARh) Word
10^0
Total Reactive
Energy Generated
(kVARh) Word
10^-3
Total Reactive
Energy Net
(kVARh) Word
10^9
Total Reactive
Energy Net
(kVARh) Word
10^6
Total Apparent
Energy (kVAh)
Word 10^6
Total Apparent
Energy (kVAh)
Word 10^3
Total Apparent
Energy (kVAh)
Word 10^0
Total Apparent
Energy (kVAh)
Word 10^-3
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Real Power
Demand
Maximum Real
Power Demand
Apparent Power
Demand
Maximum
Apparent Power
Demand
DINT
DINT
Reactive Power
Demand
DINT 4
Maximum Reactive
Demand
DINT 4
DINT 4
DINT
4
4
4
2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
Min Max
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
-2000000000 2000000000 0
0
0
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
999
2000000000
2000000000
0
0
Default Units kW kW kVAR kVAR kVA kVA
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 467
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Param
No.
Analog Monitoring 111
Parameter Name
InAnMod1Ch00
Device Profile Tag Name
I.Analog1.Ch00Data
112
113
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
I.Analog1.Ch01Data
I.Analog1.Ch02Data
114 InAnMod2Ch00
115 InAnMod2Ch01
I.Analog2.Ch00Data
I.Analog2.Ch01Data
116 InAnMod2Ch02
117 InAnMod3Ch00
I.Analog2.Ch02Data
I.Analog3.Ch00Data
118 InAnMod3Ch01
119 InAnMod3Ch02
I.Analog3.Ch01Data
I.Analog3.Ch02Data
120 InAnMod4Ch00
121 InAnMod4Ch01
I.Analog4.Ch00Data
I.Analog4.Ch01Data
122 InAnMod4Ch02 I.Analog4.Ch02Data
123
124
AnalogMod1Status I.Analog1.Ch00InputOpenWire
I.Analog1.Ch00InputOverrange
I.Analog1.Ch00InputUnderrange
I.Analog1.Ch01InputOpenWire
I.Analog1.Ch01InputOverrange
I.Analog1.Ch01InputUnderrange
I.Analog1.Ch02InputOpenWire
I.Analog1.Ch02InputOverrange
I.Analog1.Ch02InputUnderrange
I.Analog1.Ch00OutputOpenWire
I.Analog1.Ch00OutputInHold
I.Analog1.Ch00OutputOverrange
I.Analog1.Ch00OutputUnderrange
I.Analog1.AddressChanged
I.Analog1.SelftestFailed
AnalogMod2Status I.Analog3.Ch00InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch00InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch00InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch01InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch01InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch01InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch02InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch02InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch02InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputInHold
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputUnderrange
I.Analog3.AddressChanged
I.Analog3.SelftestFailed
Description Type
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 1 Input 00
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
1 Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 1 Input 01
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 1 Input 02
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 2 Input 00
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 2 Input 01
UINT 2
1
1
1
1 Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 2 Input 02
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 3 Input 00
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 3 Input 01
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 3 Input 02
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 4 Input 00
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 4 Input 01
UINT 2
Value measured at
Analog Expansion
Module 4 Input 02
Analog Expansion
Module 1 Status
UINT 2
UINT 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Analog Expansion
Module 2 Status
UINT 2 1
Min
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
-32768
Max
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
32767
Bit0= InCh00OpenCrcuit
Bit1= InCh00OverRange
Bit2= InCh00UnderRange
Bit3= InCh01OpenCrcuit
Bit4= InCh01OverRange
Bit5= InCh01UnderRange
Bit6= InCh02OpenCrcuit
Bit7= InCh02OverRange
Bit8= InCh02UnderRange
Bit9= OutOpenCircuit
Bit10= OutHoldLastSt
Bit11= OutOverRange
Bit12= OutUnderRange
Bit 13=Module Configured
Bit 14=Module Warning
Bit 15=Module Faulted
Bit0= InCh00OpenCrcuit
Bit1= InCh00OverRange
Bit2= InCh00UnderRange
Bit3= InCh01OpenCrcuit
Bit4= InCh01OverRange
Bit5= InCh01UnderRange
Bit6= InCh02OpenCrcuit
Bit7= InCh02OverRange
Bit8= InCh02UnderRange
Bit9= OutOpenCircuit
Bit10= OutHoldLastSt
Bit11= OutOverRange
Bit12= OutUnderRange
Bit 13=Module Configured
Bit 14=Module Warning
Bit 15=Module Faulted
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
468 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Analog Monitoring
(Continued)
Param
No.
125
Parameter Name Device Profile Tag Name
AnalogMod3Status I.Analog3.Ch00InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch00InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch00InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch01InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch01InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch01InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch02InputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch02InputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch02InputUnderrange
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputOpenWire
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputInHold
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputOverrange
I.Analog3.Ch00OutputUnderrange
I.Analog3.AddressChanged
Trip/Warn History
126
127
128
I.Analog3.SelftestFailed
AnalogMod4Status I.Analog4.Ch00InputOpenWire
I.Analog4.Ch00InputOverrange
I.Analog4.Ch00InputUnderrange
I.Analog4.Ch01InputOpenWire
I.Analog4.Ch01InputOverrange
I.Analog4.Ch01InputUnderrange
I.Analog4.Ch02InputOpenWire
I.Analog4.Ch02InputOverrange
I.Analog4.Ch02InputUnderrange
I.Analog4.Ch00OutputOpenWire
I.Analog4.Ch00OutputInHold
I.Analog4.Ch00OutputOverrange
I.Analog4.Ch00OutputUnderrange
I.Analog4.AddressChanged
I.Analog4.SelftestFailed
TripHistory0
TripHistory1
129
130
TripHistory2
TripHistory3
131
132
133
TripHistory4
Reserved
WarningHistory0
134
135
136
137
138
139
WarningHistory1
WarningHistory2
WarningHistory3
WarningHistory4
Reserved
TripHistoryMaskI
140 TripHistoryMaskV
C.History.OverloadTripEnEn
C.History.PhaseLossTripEn
C.History.GroundFaultCurrentTripEn
C.History.StallTripEn
C.History.JamTripEn
C.History.UnderloadTripEn
C.History.CurrentImbalanceTripEn
C.History.L1UnderCurrentTripEn
C.History.L2UnderCurrentTripEn
C.History.L3UnderCurrentTripEn
C.History.L1OverCurrentTripEn
C.History.L2OverCurrentTripEn
C.History.L3OverCurrentTripEn
C.History.L1LineLossTripEn
C.History.L2LineLossTripEn
C.History.L3LineLossTripEn
C.History.UnderVoltageTripEn
C.History.OverVoltageTripEn
C.History.VoltageImbalanceTripEn
C.History.PhaseRotationMismatchTripEn
C.History.UnderFrequencyTripEn
C.History.OverFrequencyTripEn
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
Description
Analog Expansion
Module 3 Status
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
Analog Expansion
Module 4 Status
UINT 2
Last trip to occur UINT 2
Second last trip to occur
UINT 2
UINT 2 Third last trip to occur
Fourth last trip to occur
UINT 2
Fifth last trip to occur
UINT 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Min Max
Bit0= InCh00OpenCrcuit
Bit1= InCh00OverRange
Bit2= InCh00UnderRange
Bit3= InCh01OpenCrcuit
Bit4= InCh01OverRange
Bit5= InCh01UnderRange
Bit6= InCh02OpenCrcuit
Bit7= InCh02OverRange
Bit8= InCh02UnderRange
Bit9= OutOpenCircuit
Bit10= OutHoldLastSt
Bit11= OutOverRange
Bit12= OutUnderRange
Bit 13=Module Configured
Bit 14=Module Warning
Bit 15=Module Faulted
Bit0= InCh00OpenCrcuit
Bit1= InCh00OverRange
Bit2= InCh00UnderRange
Bit3= InCh01OpenCrcuit
Bit4= InCh01OverRange
Bit5= InCh01UnderRange
Bit6= InCh02OpenCrcuit
Bit7= InCh02OverRange
Bit8= InCh02UnderRange
Bit9= OutOpenCircuit
Bit10= OutHoldLastSt
Bit11= OutOverRange
Bit12= OutUnderRange
Bit 13=Module Configured
Bit 14=Module Warning
Bit 15=Module Faulted
See Trip History Codes
See Trip History Codes
See Trip History Codes
See Trip History Codes
See Trip History Codes
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
Last warning to occur.
Second last warning to occur.
Third last warning to occur.
Fourth last warning to occur.
Fifth last warning to occur.
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
2
2
2
2
2
Trip History Mask for Current-based
Trips
UINT 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
See Warning History Codes
See Warning History Codes
0
See Warning History Codes 0
See Warning History Codes 0
See Warning History Codes 0
0
Trip History Mask for Voltage-based
Trips
UINT 2 1
Bit0= OverloadTrip
Bit1= PhaseLossTrip
Bit2= GroundFaultTrip
Bit3= StallTrip
Bit4= JamTrip
Bit5= UnderloadTrip
Bit6= CurrentImbalTrip
Bit7= L1UnderCurrTrip
Bit8= L2UnderCurrTrip
Bit9= L3UnderCurrTrip
Bit10= L1OverCurrenTrip
Bit11= L2OverCurrenTrip
Bit12= L3OverCurrenTrip
Bit13= L1LineLossTrip
Bit14= L2LineLossTrip
Bit15= L3LineLossTrip
Bit0= UnderVoltageTrip
Bit1= OvervoltageTrip
Bit2= VoltageUnbalTrip
Bit3= PhaseRotationTrp
Bit4= UnderFreqTrip
Bit5= OverFreqTrip
0xFFFF
0x3F
469
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Trip/Warn History
(continued)
Param
No.
141
142
Parameter Name
TripHistoryMaskP
TripHistoryMaskC
Device Profile Tag Name
C.History.UnderRealPowerTripEn
C.History.OverRealPowerTripEn
C.History.UnderReactivePowerConsumedTripEn
C.History.OverReactivePowerConsumedTripEn
C.History.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedTripEn
C.History.OverReactivePowerGeneratedTripEn
C.History.UnderApparentPowerTripEn
C.History.OverApparentPowerTripEn
C.History.UnderPowerFactorLaggingTripEn
C.History.OverPowerFactorLaggingTripEn
C.History.UnderPowerFactorLeadingTripEn
C.History.OverPowerFactorLeadingTripEn
C.History.TestTripEn
C.History.PTCTripEn
C.History.OperatorStationTripEn
C.History.RemoteTripEn
C.History.BlockedStartTripEn
C.History.HardwareFaultTripEn
C.History.ConfigurationTripEn
C.History.ModuleMismatchTripEn
C.History.ExpansionBusTripEn
143
144
145
146
147
TripHistoryMaskA
C.History.NVMErrorTripEn
C.History.MCCTestPositionTripEn
C.History.Analog1Ch00TripEn
C.History.Analog1Ch01TripEn
C.History.Analog1Ch02TripEn
C.History.Analog2Ch00TripEn
C.History.Analog2Ch01TripEn
C.History.Analog2Ch02TripEn
C.History.Analog3Ch00TripEn
C.History.Analog3Ch01TripEn
C.History.Analog3Ch02TripEn
C.History.Analog4Ch00TripEn
C.History.Analog4Ch01TripEn
C.History.Analog4Ch02TripEn
Reserved
WarnHistoryMaskI C.History.OverloadWarningEn
C.History.GroundFaultCurrentWarningEn
C.History.JamWarningEn
C.History.UnderloadWarningEn
C.History.CurrentImbalanceWarningEn
C.History.L1UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L2UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L3UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L1OverCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L2OverCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L3OverCurrentWarningEn
C.History.L1LineLossWarningEn
C.History.L2LineLossWarningEn
C.History.L3LineLossWarningEn
WarnHistoryMaskV C.History.UnderVoltageWarningEn
C.History.OverVoltageWarningEn
C.History.VoltageImbalanceWarningEn
C.History.PhaseRotationMismatchWarningEn
C.History.UnderFrequencyWarningEn
C.History.OverFrequencyWarningEn
WarnHistoryMaskP C.History.UnderRealPowerWarningEn
C.History.OverRealPowerWarningEn
C.History.UnderReactivePowerConsumedWarningEn
C.History.OverReactivePowerConsumedWarningEn
C.History.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedWarningEn
C.History.OverReactivePowerGeneratedWarningEn
C.History.UnderApparentPowerWarningEn
C.History.OverApparentPowerWarningEn
C.History.UnderPowerFactorLaggingWarningEn
C.History.OverPowerFactorLaggingWarningEn
C.History.UnderPowerFactorLeadingWarningEn
C.History.OverPowerFactorLeadingWarningEn
Description
Trip History Mask for Power-based
Trips
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
Trip History Mask for Control-based
Trips
Trip History Mask for Analog Input
Based Trips
UINT
UINT
2
2
1
1
Min Max
Bit0= UnderKWTrip
Bit1= OverKWTrip
Bit2= UnderKVARConTrip
Bit3= OverKVARConTrip
Bit4= UnderKVARGenTrip
Bit5= OverKVARGenTrip
Bit6= UnderKVATrip
Bit7= OverKVATrip
Bit8= UnderPFLagTrip
Bit9= OverPFLagTrip
Bit10= UnderPFLeadTrip
Bit11= OverPFLeadTrip
Bit0= TestTrip
Bit1= PTCTrip
Bit2= DLXTrip
Bit3= OperStationTrip
Bit4= RemoteTrip
Bit5= BlockedStartTrip
Bit6= HardwareFltTrip
Bit7= ConfigTrip
Bit8= OptionMatchTrip
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutTrip
Bit10= ExpansionBusTrip
Bit11= Reserved
Bit12= Reserved
Bit13= NVSTrip
Bit14=TestModeTrip
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Trip
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Trip
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Trip
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Trip
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Trip
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch02Trip
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Trip
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Trip
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Trip
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Trip
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Trip
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Trip
Default Units
0xFFF
0x27FF
0xFFF
Warning History
Mask for Currentbased Warnings
UINT 2
Warning History
Mask for Voltagebased Warnings
UINT 2
Warning History
Mask for Powerbased Warnings
UINT 2
1
1
1
Bit0= OverloadWarning
Bit1= Reserved
Bit2= GroundFltWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= JamWarning
Bit5= UnderloadWarning
Bit6= CurrentImbalWarn
Bit7= L1UnderCurrWarn
Bit8= L2UnderCurrWarn
Bit9= L3UnderCurrWarn
Bit10= L1OverCurrenWarn
Bit11= L2OverCurrenWarn
Bit12= L3OverCurrenWarn
Bit13= L1LineLossWarn
Bit14= L2LineLossWarn
Bit15= L3LineLossWarn
Bit0= UnderVoltageWarn
Bit1= OvervoltageWarn
Bit2= VoltageUnbalWarn
Bit3= PhaseRotationWrn
Bit4= UnderFreqWarning
Bit5= OverFreqWarning
Bit0= UnderKWWarning
Bit1= OverKWWarning
Bit2= UnderKVARConWarn
Bit3= OverKVARConWarn
Bit4= UnderKVARGenWarn
Bit5= OverKVARGenWarn
Bit6= UnderKVAWarning
Bit7= OverKVAWarning
Bit8= UnderPFLagWarn
Bit9= OverPFLagWarn
Bit10= UnderPFLeadWarn
Bit11= OverPFLeadWarn
0xFFFF
0x3F
0xFFF
470 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Trip/Warn History
(continued)
Param
No.
148
Parameter Name
WarnHistoryMaskC
Device Profile Tag Name
C.History.PTCWarningEn
Trip Snapshot
149
150
151
C.History.ModuleMismatchWarningEn
C.History.ExpansionBusWarningEn
C.History.NumberOfStartsWarningEn
C.History.OperatingHoursWarningEn
WarnHistoryMaskA C.History.Analog1Ch00WarningEn
C.History.Analog1Ch01WarningEn
C.History.Analog1Ch02WarningEn
C.History.Analog2Ch00WarningEn
C.History.Analog2Ch01WarningEn
C.History.Analog2Ch02WarningEn
C.History.Analog3Ch00WarningEn
C.History.Analog3Ch01WarningEn
C.History.Analog3Ch02WarningEn
C.History.Analog4Ch00WarningEn
C.History.Analog4Ch01WarningEn
C.History.Analog4Ch02WarningEn
Reserved
TSL1Current
152 TSL2Current
153 TSL3Current
154 TSThermUtilized
155 TSGFCurrent
156 TSL1toL2Voltage
157 TSL2toL3Voltage
158 TSL3toL1Voltage
159
160
TSTotalRealPwr
TSTotalkVAR
161 TSTotalkVA
162 TSTotalPF
Description
Warning History
Mask for Controlbased Warnings
Warning History
Mask for Analog
Input Based
Warnings
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
UINT 2 1
Min Max Default Units
Bit0= Reserved
Bit1= PTCWarning
Bit2= DLXWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= Reserved
Bit5= Reserved
Bit6= Reserved
Bit7= ConfigWarning
Bit8= OptionMatchWarn
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutWarn
Bit10= ExpansionBusWarn
Bit11= PMNumberOfStarts
Bit12= PMOperatingHours
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Warn
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Warn
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Warn
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Warn
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Warn
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch02Warn
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Warn
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Warn
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Warn
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Warn
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Warn
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Warn
0x1FFF
0xFFF
Snapshot of the actual L1 Phase
Current at trip
Snapshot of the actual L2 Phase
Current at trip
Snapshot of the actual L3 Phase
Current at trip
DINT
DINT
DINT
4
4
4
Snapshot of %
Thermal Capacity
Used at trip
Snapshot of the
Ground Fault
Current at trip
UINT
INT
2
2
Snapshot of 3
Phase RMS Voltage
Line-Line at trip
UINT 2
Snapshot of 3
Phase RMS Voltage
Line-Line at trip
UINT 2
Snapshot of 3
Phase RMS Voltage
Line-Line at trip
UINT 2
DINT 4 Snapshot of Total
Real Power at trip
Snapshot of Total
Reactive Power at trip
DINT 4
Snapshot of Total
Apparent Power at trip
DINT 4
Snapshot of Total
True Power Factor
(PF) at trip
INT 2
100
100
100
1
100
10
10
10
1000
1000
1000
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-1000
2000000000 0
2000000000
2000000000
100
2540
65535
65535
65535
-2000000000 2000000000
-2000000000 2000000000
2000000000
1000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Amps
Amps
Amps
%
Amps
Volt
Volt
Volt kW kVAR kVA
%
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 471
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Command
Param
No.
163
Parameter Name
TripReset O.TripReset
Device Profile Tag Name
164
165
ConfigPreset
ClearCommand
Description Type
Attempt to reset a trip
IO Configuration based on Logic
Personality
Reset
Accumulator(s)
USINT 1
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
BOOL 0=Ready
1=TripReset
USINT 0=Ready
1=Factory Defaults
0
0
Min
1
54
Max
0= Ready
1= ClrOperStats
2= ClrHistoryLogs
3= ClrPercentTCU
4= ClrKWh
5= ClrKVARh
6= ClrKVAh
7= ClrMaxKWDemad
8= ClrMaxKVARDemand
9= ClrMaxKVADemand
10= ClearAll
0
0
Default Units
0
Overload Setup
Device Setup
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
FLASetting
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
OLResetLevel
OLWarningLevel
SingleOrThree Ph
FLA2Setting
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
TripEnableI
172
173
174
169
170
171
166
167
168
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184 TripEnableV
C.FLA1
C.TripClass
C.OverloadResetMode
C.OverloadResetLevel
C.OverloadWarningLimit
C.ThreePhase
C.FLA2
C.Protection.OverloadTripEnEn
C.Protection.PhaseLossTripEn
C.Protection.GroundFaultCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.StallTripEn
C.Protection.JamTripEn
C.Protection.UnderloadTripEn
C.Protection.CurrentImbalanceTripEn
C.Protection.L1UnderCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L2UnderCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L3UnderCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L1OverCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L2OverCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L3OverCurrentTripEn
C.Protection.L1LineLossTripEn
C.Protection.L2LineLossTripEn
C.Protection.L3LineLossTripEn
C.Protection.UnderVoltageTripEn
C.Protection.OverVoltageTripEn
C.Protection.VoltageImbalanceTripEn
C.Protection.PhaseRotationMismatchTripEn
C.Protection.UnderFrequencyTripEn
C.Protection.OverFrequencyTripEn
Overload Full Load
Current Setting
UDINT 4
Trip Class Setting USINT 1
Overload and PTC
Trip Reset Mode
BOOL 1
Overload Trip Reset
Level
USINT 1
USINT 1 Overload Warning
Reset Level
Single Phase = L1 and L2
BOOL 1
Overload Full Load
Current Setting 2
UDINT 4
100
1
1
1
1
1
100
50 6553500
5
0=Manual
1=Automatic
0
30
100
0 100
0=SinglePhase
1=ThreePhase
50 6553500
50
10
0
75
85
1
50
Amps
%TCU
%TCU
Amps
Bitmask used to enable/disable current-based trips
Bitmask used to enable/disable voltage-based trips
UINT
UINT
2
2
1
1
Bit0= OverloadTrip
Bit1= PhaseLossTrip
Bit2= GroundFaultTrip
Bit3= StallTrip
Bit4= JamTrip
Bit5= UnderloadTrip
Bit6= CurrentImbalTrip
Bit7= L1UnderCurrTrip
Bit8= L2UnderCurrTrip
Bit9= L3UnderCurrTrip
Bit10= L1OverCurrenTrip
Bit11= L2OverCurrenTrip
Bit12= L3OverCurrenTrip
Bit13= L1LineLossTrip
Bit14= L2LineLossTrip
Bit15= L3LineLossTrip
Bit0= UnderVoltageTrip
Bit1= OvervoltageTrip
Bit2= VoltageUnbalTrip
Bit3= PhaseRotationTrp
Bit4= UnderFreqTrip
Bit5= OverFreqTrip
3
0
472 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Device Setup
(continued)
Param
No.
185
Parameter Name
TripEnableP
186 TripEnableC
Device Profile Tag Name
C.Protection.UnderRealPowerTripEn
C.Protection.OverRealPowerTripEn
C.Protection.UnderReactivePowerConsumedTripEn
C.Protection.OverReactivePowerConsumedTripEn
C.Protection.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedTripEn
C.Protection.OverReactivePowerGeneratedTripEn
C.Protection.UnderApparentPowerTripEn
C.Protection.OverApparentPowerTripEn
C.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLaggingTripEn
C.Protection.OverPowerFactorLaggingTripEn
C.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLeadingTripEn
C.Protection.OverPowerFactorLeadingTripEn
C.Protection.TestTripEn
C.Protection.PTCTripEn
C.Protection.OperatorStationTripEn
C.Protection.RemoteTripEn
C.Protection.BlockedStartTripEn
C.Protection.HardwareFaultTripEn
C.Protection.ConfigurationTripEn
C.Protection.ModuleMismatchTripEn
C.Protection.ExpansionBusTripEn
187 TripEnableA
C.Protection.NVMErrorTripEn
C.Protection.MCCTestPositionTripEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch00TripEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch01TripEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch02TripEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch00TripEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch01TripEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch02TripEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch00TripEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch01TripEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch02TripEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch00TripEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch01TripEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch02TripEn
188
189
Reserved
WarningEnableI
190
191
WarningEnableV
WarningEnableP
C.Protection.OverloadWarningEn
C.Protection.GroundFaultCurrentWarningEn
Bitmask used to enable/disable current-based warnings
C.Protection.JamWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderloadWarningEn
C.Protection.CurrentImbalanceWarningEn
C.Protection.L1UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L2UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L3UnderCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L1OverCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L2OverCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L3OverCurrentWarningEn
C.Protection.L1LineLossWarningEn
C.Protection.L2LineLossWarningEn
C.Protection.L3LineLossWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderVoltageWarningEn
C.Protection.OverVoltageWarningEn
C.Protection.VoltageImbalanceWarningEn
C.Protection.PhaseRotationMismatchWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderFrequencyWarningEn
C.Protection.OverFrequencyWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderRealPowerWarningEn
C.Protection.OverRealPowerWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderReactivePowerConsumedWarningEn
C.Protection.OverReactivePowerConsumedWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderReactivePowerGeneratedWarningEn
C.Protection.OverReactivePowerGeneratedWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderApparentPowerWarningEn
C.Protection.OverApparentPowerWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLaggingWarningEn
C.Protection.OverPowerFactorLaggingWarningEn
C.Protection.UnderPowerFactorLeadingWarningEn
C.Protection.OverPowerFactorLeadingWarningEn
Bitmask used to enable/disable voltage-based warnings
Bitmask used to enable/disable power-based warnings
UINT 2
UINT 2
UINT 2
Description
Bitmask used to enable/disable power-based trips
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
Bitmask used to enable/disable control-based trips
Bitmask used to enable/disable analog-based trips
UINT
UINT
2
2
1
1
Min Max
Bit0= UnderKWTrip
Bit1= OverKWTrip
Bit2= UnderKVARConTrip
Bit3= OverKVARConTrip
Bit4= UnderKVARGenTrip
Bit5= OverKVARGenTrip
Bit6= UnderKVATrip
Bit7= OverKVATrip
Bit8= UnderPFLagTrip
Bit9= OverPFLagTrip
Bit10= UnderPFLeadTrip
Bit11= OverPFLeadTrip
Bit0= TestTrip
Bit1= PTCTrip
Bit2= DLXTrip
Bit3= OperStationTrip
Bit4= RemoteTrip
Bit5= BlockedStartTrip
Bit6= HardwareFltTrip
Bit7= ConfigTrip
Bit8= OptionMatchTrip
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutTrip
Bit10= ExpansionBusTrip
Bit11= Reserved
Bit12= Reserved
Bit13= NVSTrip
Bit14=TestModeTrip
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Trip
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Trip
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Trip
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Trip
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Trip
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch02Trip
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Trip
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Trip
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Trip
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Trip
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Trip
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Trip
1
0
0
Default Units
1
1
1
Bit0= OverloadWarning
Bit1= Reserved
Bit2= GroundFltWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= JamWarning
Bit5= UnderloadWarning
Bit6= CurrentImbalWarn
Bit7= L1UnderCurrWarn
Bit8= L2UnderCurrWarn
Bit9= L3UnderCurrWarn
Bit10= L1OverCurrenWarn
Bit11= L2OverCurrenWarn
Bit12= L3OverCurrenWarn
Bit13= L1LineLossWarn
Bit14= L2LineLossWarn
Bit15= L3LineLossWarn
Bit0= UnderVoltageWarn
Bit1= OvervoltageWarn
Bit2= VoltageUnbalWarn
Bit3= PhaseRotationWrn
Bit4= UnderFreqWarning
Bit5= OverFreqWarning
Bit0= UnderKWWarning
Bit1= OverKWWarning
Bit2= UnderKVARConWarn
Bit3= OverKVARConWarn
Bit4= UnderKVARGenWarn
Bit5= OverKVARGenWarn
Bit6= UnderKVAWarning
Bit7= OverKVAWarning
Bit8= UnderPFLagWarn
Bit9= OverPFLagWarn
Bit10= UnderPFLeadWarn
Bit11= OverPFLeadWarn
0
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 473
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Device Setup
(continued)
Param
No.
192
Parameter Name
WarningEnableC
Device Profile Tag Name
C.Protection.PTCWarningEn
193
194
195
196
197
198
WarningEnableA
C.Protection.ModuleMismatchWarningEn
C.Protection.ExpansionBusWarningEn
C.Protection.NumberOfStartsWarningEn
C.Protection.OperatingHoursWarningEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch00WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch01WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog1Ch02WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch00WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch01WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog2Ch02WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch00WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch01WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog3Ch02WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch00WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch01WarningEn
C.Protection.Analog4Ch02WarningEn
Reserved
SetOperatingMode
InPt00Assignment C.Pt00InputFunction_0
C.Pt00InputFunction_1
C.Pt00InputFunction_2
C.Pt00InputFunction_3
InPt01Assignment C.Pt01InputFunction_0
C.Pt01InputFunction_1
C.Pt01InputFunction_2
C.Pt01InputFunction_3
InPt02Assignment C.Pt02InputFunction_0
C.Pt02InputFunction_1
C.Pt02InputFunction_2
C.Pt02InputFunction_3
Description
Bitmask used to enable/disable control-based warnings
Bitmask used to enable/disable analog-based warnings
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
UINT 2 1
Min Max
Bit0= Reserved
Bit1= PTCWarning
Bit2= DLXWarning
Bit3= Reserved
Bit4= Reserved
Bit5= Reserved
Bit6= Reserved
Bit7= ConfigWarning
Bit8= OptionMatchWarn
Bit9= DLXFBTimeoutWarn
Bit10= ExpansionBusWarn
Bit11= PMNumberOfStarts
Bit12= PMOperatingHour
Bit0= InAnMod1Ch00Warn
Bit1= InAnMod1Ch01Warn
Bit2= InAnMod1Ch02Warn
Bit3= InAnMod2Ch00Warn
Bit4= InAnMod2Ch01Warn
Bit5= InAnMod2Ch02Warn
Bit6= InAnMod3Ch00Warn
Bit7= InAnMod3Ch01Warn
Bit8= InAnMod3Ch02Warn
Bit9= InAnMod4Ch00Warn
Bit10= InAnMod4Ch01Warn
Bit11= InAnMod4Ch02Warn
0
0
Default Units
Logic personality
Selection
Assignment for
Input Point 00 function
USINT 1
USINT 1
1
1
2
0
Assignment for
Input Point 01 function
Assignment for
Input Point 02 function
USINT
USINT
1
1
1
1
2 54
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0
0
474 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Device Setup
(continued
Param
No.
199
Parameter Name Device Profile Tag Name
InPt03Assignment C.Pt03InputFunction_0
C.Pt03InputFunction_1
C.Pt03InputFunction_2
C.Pt03InputFunction_3
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
InPt04Assignment C.Pt03InputFunction_0
InPt05Assignment C.Pt05InputFunction_0
C.Pt05InputFunction_1
C.Pt05InputFunction_2
OutPt0Assignment
OutPt1Assignment
OutPt2Assignment
StartsPerHour
StartsInterval
PMTotalStarts
C.Pt03InputFunction_1
C.Pt03InputFunction_2
C.Pt03InputFunction_3
C.Pt05InputFunction_3
C.StartsPerHourLimit
C.StartsIntervalLimit
C.TotalStartsLimit
Description
Assignment for
Input Point 03 function
Assignment for
Input Point 04 function
Assignment for
Input Point 05 function
Assignment for
OutputPt00 function
Assignment for
OutputPt01 function
Assignment for
OutputPt02 function
Type
USINT 1
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Min
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0=Normal
1=TripRelay
2=ControlRelay
3=TripAlarm
4=WarningAlarm
5=MonL1TripRelay
6= MonL2TripRelay
7= MonL3TripRelay
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0=Normal
1=TripReset
2=RemoteTrip
3=ActivateFLA2
4=ForceSnapshot
5=EmergencyStart
6=TestMode
7=L1LossArm
8=L2LossArm
9=L3LossArm
10=L1L2LossArm
11=L2L3LossArm
12=L1L3LossArm
13=L1L2L3LossArm
0=Normal
1=TripRelay
2=ControlRelay
3=TripAlarm
4=WarningAlarm
5=MonL1TripRelay
6= MonL2TripRelay
7= MonL3TripRelay
0=Normal
1=TripRelay
2=ControlRelay
3=TripAlarm
4=WarningAlarm
5=MonL1TripRelay
6= MonL2TripRelay
7= MonL3TripRelay
0 120 Allowable Starts per Hour
The minimum allowable interval between starts
Total number of starts for preventative maintenance
USINT 1
UINT 2
UINT 2
1
1
0
0
3600
Max
65535
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Default Units
2
600 s
Second
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 475
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Device Setup
(continued
Param
No.
208
Parameter Name Device Profile Tag Name
PMOperatingHours C.OperatingHoursLimit
209 ActFLA2wOutput C.FLA2Select_0
C.FLA2Select_1
C.FLA2Select_2
C.FLA2Select_3
210
211
Reserved
SecurityPolicy
212
213
214
215
216
Language
FeedbackTimeout
TransitionDelay
InterlockDelay
EmergencyStartEn C.EmergencyStartEn
Options Setup
217
218
219
220
221
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ControlModuleTyp
Description
Total operating hours for preventative maintenance
Select FLA2 activate source
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
0
Min
USINT 1 1 0=Disable
1=OutputPt00
2=OutputPt01
3=OutputPt02
Max
65535 0
Default Units
Hrs
0
Select network security feature locks
UINT 2
Select the language
USINT 1
DeviceLogix
Feedback Timer
Timeout
Motor Contactor
Transition Delay
Motor Contactor
Interlock Delay
UINT
UINT
UINT
2
2
2
Enables the ability to command an
Emergency Start of the motor
UINT 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit0= DeviceConfigEna
Bit1= DeviceResetEna
Bit2= FWUpdateEnable
Bit3= NetworkCfgEna
Bit4= PortCfgEna
Bit5= Reserved
Bit6= Reserved
Bit7= Reserved
Bit8= Reserved
Bit9= Reserved
Bit10= Reserved
Bit11= Reserved
Bit12= Reserved
Bit13= Reserved
Bit14= Reserved
Bit15= PolicyConfigEna
0 2
0 65535
0
1
0=Disable
1=Enable
65535
65535
0x8007
0
500
10000
100
0
222
223
SensingModuleTyp
CommsModuleType
Select Control
Module Type
USINT 1
Select Sensing
Module Type
USINT 1
Select
Communications
Module Type
USINT 1
1
1
1
0= IgnoreType
1= 6In3Out24VDC
2= 4In3Out120VAC
3= 4In3Out240VAC
4= 4In2OutGFPTC24V
5= 2In2OutGFPTC120V
6= 2In2OutGFPTC240V
0= IgnoreType
1= VIGPt5to30Amp
2= VIG6to60Amp
3= VIG10to100Amp
4= VIG20to200Amp
5= IGPt5to30Amp
6= IG6to60Amp
7= IG10to100Amp
8= IG20to200Amp
9= IPt5to30Amp
10= I6to60Amp
11= I10to100Amp
12= I20to200Amp
0=IgnoreType
1=EtherNetIP
2=DeviceNet
3=Profibus
0
0
0
476 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Options Setup
(Continued)
Param
No.
224
225
226
227
228
Parameter Name
OperStationType
DigitalMod1Type
DigitalMod2Type
DigitalMod3Type
DigitalMod4Type
229 AnalogMod1Type
230 AnalogMod2Type
231 AnalogMod3Type
232 AnalogMod4Type
233 MismatchAction
Current Setup
237
238
239
234
235
236
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
PLInhibitTime
240 PLTripDelay
C.PhaseLossInhibitTime
C.PhaseLossTripDelay
241 GroundFaultType C.GroundFaultType
242
243
GFInhibitTime
GFTripDelay
Device Profile Tag Name Description
Select Operator
Station Type
Select Digital I/O
Expansion Module
1 Type
Select Digital I/O
Expansion Module
2 Type
Select Digital I/O
Expansion Module
3 Type
Select Digital I/O
Expansion Module
4 Type
Select Analog I/O
Expansion Module
1 Type
Type
USINT 1
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
1
1
1
1
1
Select Analog I/O
Expansion Module
2 Type
USINT 1
Select Analog I/O
Expansion Module
3 Type
USINT 1
Select Analog I/O
Expansion Module
4 Type
USINT 1
Select Mismatched
Module Actions
0=warning 1= fault
UINT 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Min Max
0= IgnoreType
1= NoStation
2= ControlStation
3= DiagStation
0= IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=4In2Out24VDC
3=4In2Out120VAC
4=4In2Out240VAC
0= IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=4In2Out24VDC
3=4In2Out120VAC
4=4In2Out240VAC
0= IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=4In2Out24VDC
3=4In2Out120VAC
4=4In2Out240VAC
0= IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=4In2Out24VDC
3=4In2Out120VAC
4=4In2Out240VAC
0=IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=3In1OutAnalog
0=IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=3In1OutAnalog
0=IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=3In1OutAnalog
0=IgnoreType
1=NoModule
2=3In1OutAnalog
Bit0= ControlModule
Bit1= SensingModule
Bit2= CommsModule
Bit3= OperatorStation
Bit4= DigitalModule1
Bit5= DigitalModule2
Bit6= DigitalModule3
Bit7= DigitalModule4
Bit8= AnalogModule1
Bit9= AnalogModule1
Bit10= AnalogModule1
Bit11= AnalogModule1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default Units
C.GroundFaultInhibitTime
C.GroundFaultTripDelay
Phase Loss Inhibit
Time
Phase Loss Trip
Delay
Select Ground
Fault Type
USINT
USINT
USINT
1
1
1
Ground Fault
Inhibit Time
USINT 1
Ground Fault Trip
Delay
USINT 1
1
10
1
1
10
0
1
250
250
0= Disabled
1= Internal1to5Amps
2= ExtPt02toPt1Amps
3= ExtPt1toPt5Amps
4= ExtPt5to1Amps
5= External1to5Amps
0 250
0
10 s
Second s
Second
0
0 250
10
5 s
Second s
Second
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 477
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Param
No.
244
Parameter Name
GFTripLevel
Device Profile Tag Name
C.GroundFaultTripLimit
245 GFWarningDelay C.GroundFaultWarnDelay
Description Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
Scale
Factor
100 2 Ground Fault Trip
Level
Ground Fault
Warning Delay
USINT 1 10 0
Min
500
Max
250
Default Units
200 Amps
0 s
Second
478 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Current Setup continued
Param
No.
246
Parameter Name
GFWarningLevel
Device Profile Tag Name
C.GroundFaultWarnLimit
247 GFFilter C.GroundFaultFilterEn
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
270
271
272
267
268
269
273
GFMaxInhibit
StallEnabledTime
StallTripLevel
JamInhibitTime
JamTripDelay
JamTripLevel
JamWarningLevel
ULInhibitTime
ULTripDelay
ULTripLevel
ULWarningLevel
CIInhibitTime
CITripDelay
CITripLevel
CIWarningLevel
CTPrimary
CTSecondary
UCInhibit Time
L1UCTripDelay
L1UCTripLevel C.L1UnderCurrentTripLimit
L1UCWarningLevel C.L1UnderCurrentWarnLimit
L2UCTripDelay C.L2UnderCurrentTripDelay
L2UCTripLevel C.L2UnderCurrentTripLimit
L2UCWarningLevel C.L2UnderCurrentWarnLimit
L3UCTripDelay C.L3UnderCurrentTripDelay
L3UCTripLevel
C.GroundFaultMaxInhibitEn
C.StallEnabledTime
C.StallTripLimit
C.JamInhibitTime
C.JamTripDelay
C.JamTripLimit
C.JamWarnLimit
C.UnderloadInhibitTime
C.UnderloadTripDelay
C.UnderloadTripLimit
C.UnderloadWarnLimit
C.CurrentImbalanceInhibitTime
C.CurrentImbalanceTripDelay
C.CurrentImbalanceTripLimit
C.CurrentImbalanceWarnLimit
C.CTPrimary
C.CTSecondary
C.UnderCurrentInhibitTime
C.L1UnderCurrentTripDelay
C.L3UnderCurrentTripLimit
Underload Trip
Level
Underload
Warning Level
USINT
USINT
1
1
Current Imbalance
Inhibit Time
USINT 1
Current Imbalance
Trip Delay
USINT 1
Current Imbalance
Trip Level
USINT 1
Current Imbalance
Warning Level
USINT 1
UINT 2 Current
Transformer
Primary Ratio
Current
Transformer
Secondary Ratio
Under Current
Inhibit Time
UINT
USINT
2
1
L1 Under Current
Trip Delay
USINT 1
L1 Under Current
Trip Level
L1 Under Current
Warning Level
L2 Under Current
Trip Delay
USINT 1
USINT 1
USINT 1
L2 Under Current
Trip Level
L2 Under Current
Warning Level
L3 Under Current
Trip Delay
USINT 1
USINT 1
USINT 1
L3 Under Current
Trip Level
USINT 1
Description
Ground Fault
Warning Level
Filter GF current from %TCU calculation
Trip is inhibited when GF exceeds max value
Stall Monitor and
Trip Delay
Type
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
Scale
Factor
100
BOOL 1
BOOL 1
USINT 1
1
1
1
2
Min
0=Disable
1=Enable
0=Disable
1=Enable
0
500
250
Max
Stall Trip Level
Jam Detect Inhibit
Time
UINT 2
USINT 1
10
1
100
0
600
250
Jam Detect Trip
Delay
USINT 1
Jam Detect Trip
Level
Jam Detect
Warning Level
Underload Inhibit
Time
UINT 2
UINT 2
USINT 1
Underload Trip
Delay
USINT 1
10
1
1
1
10
1
50
50
0
1
250
600
600
250
250
1
1
1
10
10
0
100
100
250
10
1
1
1
1
1
10
1
1
10
1
1
10
1
1
10
10
1
1
0
0
10
10
0
10
10
0
10
250
100
100
65535
65535
250
250
100
100
250
100
100
250
100
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015
0
10
600
10
50
250
150
10
50
50
70
10
50
35
20
5
5
10
10
35
40
10
35
40
10
Default Units
200 Amps
0
35
479
%FLA s
Second s
Second
%FLA
%FLA s
Second
%FLA s
Second s
Second
%FLA s
Second s
Second
%
% s
Second s
Second
%
% s
Second
%
% s
Second
%
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Current Setup continued
Param
No.
277
Parameter Name
L1OCTripLevel
Device Profile Tag Name
C.L1OverCurrentTripLimit
278 L1OCWarningLevel C.L1OverCurrentWarnLimit
279 L2OCTripDelay
280
281
282
L2OCTripLevel C.L2OverCurrentTripDelay
L2OCWarningLevel C.L2OverCurrentTripLimit
L3OCTripDelay C.L2OverCurrentWarnLimit
283
284
285
L3OCTripLevel C.L3OverCurrentTripDelay
L3OCWarningLevel C.L3OverCurrentTripLimit
LineLossInhTime C.L3OverCurrentWarnLimit
286 L1LossTripDelay C.LineLossInhibitTime
287 L2LossTripDelay C.L1LineLossTripDelay
288 L3LossTripDelay C.L2LineLossTripDelay
Description
L1 Over Current
Trip Level
L1 Over Current
Warning Level
L2 Over Current
Trip Delay
Type
USINT 1
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
10
Min
USINT 1
USINT 1
1
10
10
0
L2 Over Current
Trip Level
L2 Over Current
Warning Level
L3 Over Current
Trip Delay
USINT
USINT
1
1
USINT 1
L3 Over Current
Trip Level
L3 Over Current
Warning Level
Line Loss Inhibit
Time
USINT 1
USINT 1
USINT 1
L1 Line Loss Trip
Delay
USINT 1
1
1
10
1
1
1
10
10
10
0
10
10
0
0
L2 Line Loss Trip
Delay
USINT 1
L3 Line Loss Trip
Delay
USINT 1
10
10
0
0
200
200
250
200
200
250
200
Max
200
250
250
250
250
100
90
10
100
90
10
Default Units
100 %
90 %
10 s
Second
%
% s
Second
%
10
10
10
% s
Second s
Second s
Second s
Second
480 Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - November 2013
Parameter List Appendix B
Group
Communications
Setup
Param
No.
289
Parameter Name
OutputAssembly
Device Profile Tag Name
C.L3LineLossTripDelay
290 InputAssembly
291 Datalink0
292 Datalink1
293 Datalink2
294 Datalink3
295 Datalink4
296 Datalink5
297 Datalink6
298 Datalink7
299
300
301
302
303
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description Type
Output Assembly
Instance used by IO
Connections
UINT 2
Data Size
(bytes)
1
Scale
Factor
1 Input Assembly
Instance used by IO
Connections
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink0
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink1
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink2
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink3
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink4
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink5
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink6
Parameter Number
UINT 2
Produced I/O
Assembly
Datalink7
Parameter Number
UINT 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
180
300
560
560
560
560
560
560
560
560
Max Default Units
144
300
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015D-EN-P - February 2015 481
Appendix B Parameter List
Group
Output Setup
314
315
316
317
310
311
312
313
318
319
320
321
322
306
307
308
309
Param
No.
304
Parameter Name
OutPt00PrFltAct
Device Profile Tag Name
C.Pt00OutputProtectionFaultMode
305 OutPt00PrFltVal C.Pt00OutputProtectionFaultValue
OutPt00ComFltAct
OutPt00ComFltVal
OutPt00ComIdlAct
OutPt00ComIdlVal
C.Pt00OutputFaultMode
C.Pt00OutputFaultValue
C.Pt00OutputProgMode
C.Pt00OutputProgValue
OutPt01PrFltAct
OutPt01PrFltVal
OutPt02PrFltAct
OutPt02PrFltVal
OutPt02ComFltAct
OutPt02ComFltVal
OutPt02ComIdlAct
OutPt02ComIdlVal
OutDig1PrFltAct
C.Pt01OutputProtectionFaultMode
C.Pt01OutputProtectionFaultValue
OutPt01ComFltAct C.Pt01OutputFaultMode
OutPt01ComFltVal C.Pt01OutputFaultValue
OutPt01ComIdlAct C.Pt01OutputProgMode
OutPt01ComIdlVal C.Pt01OutputProgValue
C.Pt02OutputProtectionFaultMode
C.Pt02OutputProtectionFaultValue
C.Pt02OutputFaultMode
C.Pt02OutputFaultValue
C.Pt02OutputProgMode
C.Pt02OutputProgValue
C.Digital1ProtectionFaultMode
323 OutDig1PrFltVal C.Digital1ProtectionFaultValue
324 OutDig1ComFltAct C.Digital1FaultMode
325 OutDig1ComFltVal C.Digital1FaultValue
326 OutDig1ComIdlAct C.Digital1ProgMode
327 OutDig1ComIdlVal C.Digital1ProgValue
328 OutDig2PrFltAct C.Digital2ProtectionFaultMode
329 OutDig2PrFltVal C.Digital2ProtectionFaultValue
482
Output Pt02 action on comms idle
BOOL 1
BOOL 1 Output Pt02 value on comms idle
Digital Expansion
Module 1 Outputs action on protection fault
BOOL 1
BOOL 1 Digital Expansion
<